Home

BreezeACCESS VL 6.6 System Manual

1. NOTE 1 Japan 4 9 GHz 10 MHz Bandwidth In BreezeACCESSVL units operating in the 4 9 GHz Japan band not B amp B point to point with a 10 MHz bandwidth the following rules must be met for full compliance with regulations 1 When operating at 4945 MHz the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a value above 11 dBm The Maximum Transmit Power of the SU should not be set to a value above 10 dBm 2 When operating at 5055 MHz the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a value above 13 dBm The Maximum Transmit power of the SU should not be set to a value above 10 dBm This requirement although not indicated in the certification document is needed following the tests performed in the certification lab NOTE 2 FCC 5 3 GHZ 10 MHz Bandwidth BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters For full compliance with FCC regulation of units with HW rev C using a 10 MHz bandwidth if you wish to include frequency channel 5265 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs should not be set to a value above 25 Antenna Gain If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters this frequency should not be used NOTE 3 FCC 5 3 GHZ 20 MHz Bandwidth For full compliance with FCC regulations the following requirements should be followed in un
2. Table 1 25 Ethernet Pin Out Assignments Radio Power Pins 4 amp 7 Power 5 amp 8 Power 56V 1 9 5 4 3 Electrical Table 1 26 Electrical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit Unit Details General Power consumption 25W IDU AC power input 85 265 VAC 50 60 Hz AU ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor outdoor Ethernet cable 1 9 5 5 25dBi Antenna for B amp B point to point link Table 1 27 25dBi Antenna Specifications Item Description Regulatory Compliance ETSI EN 302 085 V1 1 2 2001 02 Range1 Frequency Range 4 900 5 100 GHz Gain 25dBi min Azimuth Beamwidth 6 Elevation Beamwidth 6 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Table 1 27 25dBi Antenna Specifications Continued Item Description Polarization Linear Vertical Horizontal Dimensions cm 45x45x3 Weight kg 3 max excluding mounting kit Connector N Type Female Mounting Kit 2 75 3 5 pole 0 to 10 tilt 2 2kg 1 9 5 6 SU I D Wall Window Detached Antenna Table 1 28 SU I D Wall Window Detached Antenna Specifications Item Description Frequency Range 5 150 5 875 GHz Gain 15dBi net excluding cable loss Azimuth Beamwidth 45 55 Elevation Beamwidth 10 12 Polarization Linear Vertical Dimensions cm 33 x9 3x2
3. 48V DC DC Power Jack Connection to Power Adapter After power up the SIGNAL LEDs illuminates for a few seconds until self test is finished 2 5 3 Installation Guidelines The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf Instructions for the available installation options of the detached antenna included in the SU I D package are provided in the antenna package and in Installing the Detached Antenna on page 51 It is recommended to install the antenna on a window or on a wall according to specific conditions of the location The antenna should be facing the direction of the Base Station Use only the RF cable supplied with the antenna if needed use a longer Ethernet cable Avoid metal obstacles such as metal window frames or metal film anti glare windows in the transmission path Position the antenna away from electrical equipment including the data equipment monitor etc metal furniture and moving metal objects such as metal fans or doors BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp B 50 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I 2 5 4 Installing the SU I 2 5 4 1 Connecting the SU I me gt To install the SU I Connect the Power Adapter DC cable to the POWER jack Connect the Power Adapter to the AC mains Verify that the green Status LED located on the unit s front panel illuminates indicating that the power supply to the unit is OK and self test passed successfully Connect the RF cable s
4. BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp op e Chapter 3 Commissioning Operation Verification 3 5 4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection Modular Base station After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator which is the yellow LED embedded in the 10 100 BaseT connector is on This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment The Ethernet Activity Indicator which is the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the 10 100 BaseT port 3 5 5 Verifying the Indoor to Outdoor Connection Modular Base Station After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator which is the yellow LED embedded in the RADIO connector is on This indicates that the unit has detected an Ethernet link connection The Ethernet Activity Indicator which is the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the RADIO port 3 5 6 Verifying Data Connectivity To verify data connectivity from the end user s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit ping the Access Unit or try to connect to the Internet BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp B Chapter 4 Operation and Administration In This Chapter M Working with the Monitor Program on page 81 M Menus and Parameters on page 84 INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that ar
5. 8 To PC IDU ODU cable to IDU Figure 3 1 Connecting the Y cable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ea Ga Q Chapter 3 Commissioning Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna 3 3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna INFORMATION This antenna alignment process described in this section is applicable to both the SU A E ODU and the amay SU I antenna unless stated otherwise The SNR bar display is located on the bottom panel of the SU A E ODU front panel of the SU I indoor unit The ten LEDs indicate the quality of the received signal The higher the number of green LEDs indicating On the higher the quality of the received signal This section describes how to align the Subscriber Unit antenna using the SNR bar display INFORMATION The behavior described above for the bar is called Normal Mode and is enabled by default However the n LEDs behavior can be customized by the user see LED Mode SU only on page 99 If this is the case make sure that Normal Mode is enabled prior to aligning the antenna For optimal alignment it is recommended to use the Continuous Average SNR RSSI Display option see Continuous Average SNR RSSI Display on page 108 It is recommended to also verify the quality of the uplink using the Continuous Uplink Quality Indicator Display option see Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display on page 109 when there is traffic in the uplink INFORMATION Antenna
6. 40 Figure 2 7 Bottom Panel of the ODU all ODUs except to new ODU shown without the sealing assembly mrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 42 Figure 2 8 Bottom Panel of the New SU A ODU without IDU COM Sealing Cap l rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnn 42 Figure 2 9 Bottom Panel of the New 0 9 GHz ODU without the IDU COM Sealing Cap 42 Figure 2 10 The Waterproof Seal is scecccccntsnetastansewetiis ncaa sece dunwh eekanna dacnnepetanedeeseantanngemasaxdeonomonedpenel 43 Figure 2 11 Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap rnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnennnnnnnr 44 Figure 2 12 Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap rxnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 45 Figure 2 13 IDU PS 1073 Front Panel sisirin paenan aaaeaii 46 FEE TE SUT PA Aae 49 Figure 2 15 Wall Mounting Me Anfennauaauaauarsrsnindnadeumssenkemmnek ulike 53 Figure 2 16 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability eesnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnenen 54 Figure 2 17 Window Mounting the Antenna s xennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnen 56 Figure 2 18 Window Mounting with Rotation Capability ssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnen 57 Figure 2 19 BS SH Chassis Slot Assignment wcsistsiieesssetesecessnenssserccnnecsntsaasceeneneesneteentiexertecueectetnes 58 Figure 2 20 BS PS AC Front Panel alee sacecsetcnenatetexnaaaeereanatdnacsacetenananconcactessassersnerc
7. alvarion Click Here to send your feedback BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Software Version 6 6 August 2011 P N 215885 Document History Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued FIPS 197 Sections 4 2 5 8 3 4 2 6 7 Optional support under license of FIPS 197 compliant encryption SW Version 4 0 July 2006 4 9 GHz B amp B models 9 5 4 1 Section 1 6 1 8 1 1 9 5 1 1 1 AU SU with 25dBi antennas for point to point links in the 4 9 GHz band SW Version 4 0 July 2006 AUS functionality change Section 1 2 4 2 6 2 12 AUS can support up to 8 SU 3 SU 6 units increased from 5 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 IDU ODU Cable Section 2 1 2 Update of maximum length of IDU ODU cable SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Frequency configuration Section 4 2 6 2 3 1 4 2 6 2 5 Improved mechanism for automatic detection of frequency bandwidth Removed parameters Sub Band select SU Frequency Subset Definition SU New parameters User Defined Frequency Subsets SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Transmit Power Maximum Transmit Power Section 4 2 6 2 8 Simplified configuration mechanism A single parameter instead of per modulation level parameters SW Version 4 0 July 2006 5 3 FCC limitations Section 4 2 6 2 4 1 Update Tx Power limitations for compliance with FCC regulations SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Per SU Distance Learning
8. Pins 4 amp 7 Power 5 amp 8 Power 56V 1 9 5 1 3 Electrical 1 9 5 2 Table 1 15 Electrical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit Unit Details General Power consumption 25W IDU AC power input 85 265 VAC 50 60 Hz ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor outdoor Ethernet cable SU I Subscriber Unit 1 9 5 2 1 Mechanical and Electrical Table 1 16 Mechanical and Electrical Specifications SU I Subscriber Unit Item Details Dimensions cm 11 8 H x 20 L x 3 1 W Weight g 600 Power Consumption 15W maximum DC Power Input from Power Supply 48 VDC Mains Power Input to Power Supply 90 265 VAC 47 63 Hz BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description 1 9 5 2 2 Connectors Table 1 17 Connectors SU I Subscriber Unit Connector Description ETHERNET 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable connection to a PC straight Cable connection to a hub crossed POWER 48 VDC DC Power Plug RF SMA jack Table 1 18 Ethernet Pin Out Assignments Radio Power Pins 4 amp 7 Power 5 amp 8 Power 56V 1 9 5 3 Modular Base Station Equipment 1 9 5 3 1 Mechanical Specifications Table 1 19 Mechanical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment Unit Structure Dimensions cm Weight kg B
9. Figure 2 14 SU I Panel Table 2 5 SU I Panel Components Name Description Functionality O Status Self test and power Green Power is available and self test passed indication Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation Red Self test failed Fatal error Ethernet Ethernet activity Green Ethernet link between the SU I and the data 5 connectivity indication equipment is detected no activity Blinking Green Ethernet connectivity is OK with traffic on the port Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate Red No Ethernet connectivity between the SU I and the data equipment BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O D Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I Table 2 5 SU I Panel Components Continued Name Description Functionality W Link Wireless Link traffic Green Unit is associated with an AU no wireless link Indication activity Blinking Green Data received or transmitted on the wireless link Blinking rate is proportional to traffic rate Off Wireless link disabled bar Received signal strength Red LED Signal is too low lt 4dB Indication er 8 green LEDs Quality of the received signal Orange LED Signal is too high gt 50dB ETH RJ 45 Connector Connection to the user s LAN PC E Cable connection to a hub switch router Crossed E Cable connection to a PC Straight Y RF SMA Jack Connection to detached antenna
10. Table 3 9 SU I LEDs Name Description Functionality O Status Self test and power M Green Power is available and self test indication passed E Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation M Red Self test failed Fatal error Ethernet Ethernet activity E Green Ethernet link between the SU I and as connectivity indication the data equipment is detected no activity E Blinking Green Ethernet connectivity is OK with traffic on the port Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate E Red No Ethernet connectivity between the SU I and the data equipment W Link Wireless Link traffic M Green Unit is associated with an AU no Indication wireless link activity E Blinking Green Data received or transmitted on the wireless link Blinking rate is proportional to traffic rate E Off Wireless link disabled Table 3 10 SU I SNR Bar LED Functionality In Normal Mode SNR Bar LEDs SNR typical LED 1 red is On Signal is too low SNR lt 4 dB LED 2 green is On SNR gt 4 dB LEDs 2 to 3 green are On SNR gt 8 dB LEDs 2 to 4 green are On SNR gt 13 dB LEDs 2 to 5 green are On SNR gt 19 dB LEDs 2 to 6 green are On SNR gt 26 dB LEDs 2 to 7 green are On SNR gt 31 dB LEDs 2 to 8 green are On SNR gt 38 dB LEDs 2 to 9 green are On SNR gt 44 dB LEDs 2 to 9 green and 10 orange are On Signal is too high SNR gt 50 dB
11. BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Source address Destination Length Frame Check address Ether Type Sequence DA SA LevElype Data FCS Original Ethernet frame jj 802 1Q frame from Eas d L o l de oder ro customer network DA sa Etype Tag Etype Tag Len Etype Data FCS l l l l l Double tagged frame 118115 Figure 4 2 Service Provider Link The following tables summarize the functionality of the SU AU data port for a Service Provider Link Table 4 14 VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU Service Provider Link Action Data Port SU Accept from Untagged frames Ethernet Single tagged frames E If Forwarding is disabled E if Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Accept from Single tagged frames only frames with a Service Provider tag whose parameters Wireless match the Service Provider parameters defined in the unit Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ Ethertype Double tagged frames only frames with a Service Provider tag whose parameters match the Service Provider parameters defined in the unit Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ Ethertype If Forwarding is enabled only frames with Customer VLAN ID values that are included in the Forwarding List Tag Insert Service Provider SP tag to wireless
12. INFORMATION Use only Category 5E 4x2x24 FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer See list of approved y cables and length limitations in section Indoor to Outdoor Cables on page 33 4 Insert and crimp the RJ 45 connector Refer to Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable 5 Connect the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit RJ 45 connector 6 Replace the waterproof seal and then the top nut Make sure that the external jack of the cable is well inside the waterproof seal to guarantee a good seal BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Se Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit 7 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 8 Assemble an RJ 45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the indoor to outdoor cable 2 3 5 2 Units with a Waterproof Seal Supplied with the Ethernet Cable not applicable to new ODU To connect the indoor to outdoor cable I Verify that the o ring supplied with the cable kit is in place 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit Attach the waterproof seal to the unit Tighten the top nut N UW Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 5 Assemble an RJ 45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the indoor to outdoor cable See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable 2 3 5 3 New ODU 1 The sealing cap has a special groove allowin
13. SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Unit Control Menu Section 4 2 3 Re apply Country Codes Values option has been removed available in Basic and Advanced Configuration Country Code Parameters SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Wi2 IP Address Section 4 2 6 3 8 Updated name was previously AP Client IP Address SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Basic Configuration Menu Section 4 2 4 Added Country Code Parameters SW Version 5 0 November 2007 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Country Code Parameters Sections 4 2 6 8 3 1 2 Table 3 1 New SW Version 5 0 November 2007 SU 3 and SU 6 units Section 1 3 1 Starting on SW Version 5 0 all units will support a full LAN SW Version 5 0 November 2007 AUS Sections 1 2 1 1 2 2 An optional license enables support of SU 54 units SW Version 5 0 November 2007 SU aging mechanism removal from Association Database 62 12 Sections 4 2 2 1 4 2 5 4 1 4 2 Updated SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Maximum Number of Associations with Data Encryption enabled Sections 4 2 6 2 12 4 2 6 7 2 Maximum Number of Associations must be set to 124 or lower to enable Data Encryption SW Version 5 0 November 2007 MIR and CIR Parameters Section 4 2 6 6 2 Updated description of Burst Duration algorithm SW Version 5 0 November 2007
14. a From the Main Menu select 2 Unit Control BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D QD Appendix A Software Version Loading Using TFTP b From the Unit Control menu select 5 Flash Memory Control c From the Flash Memory Control menu select S Show Flash Versions The following information is displayed Flash Versions Running from Main Version Main Version File Name 4 5 16 bz Main Version Number 4 5 16 Shadow Version File Name 5 0 13 bz Shadow Version Number 5 0 13 INFORMATION After loading a new SW version with any changes in the relevant Country Code these changes must be applied by activation the Re apply Country Code Values option in the Unit Control Menu Note that gt following activation of the Re apply Country Code Values option all parameters that are affected by the Country Code frequency parameters transmit power parameters DFS operation modulation level parameters burst mode parameters revert to their factory default values and must be re configured BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 209 Appendix B File Download and Upload Using TFTP INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this appendix does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commi
15. Automatic Noise Floor Selection For optimizing both the operating channel and noise floor level AU only M 1 Automatic Noise Floor Selection For optimizing only the noise floor level E 2 Clear Channel Selection For optimizing only the operating channel AU only M 3 Statistics Only For performing only a spectrum analysis without modifying the operating channel or noise floor level 4 2 6 2 22 2 Advanced Settings Use this menu to provide additional parameters that will refine the analysis performed by the Interference Mitigation mechanism The default values for Advanced Settings have been selected to optimize the results while complying with the typical hardware configuration and installation therefore you may safely ignore these parameters leaving their default settings in place However experienced users may find some benefit from adjusting the parameters thus optimizing the results for their specific needs 4 2 6 2 22 2 1AU Height Indicates the height in meters of the AU antenna It is useful for calculating the distance The available range is from 15 to 200 meters The default is 30 meters 4 2 6 2 22 2 2AU SU Antenna Gain M SU Antenna Gain The antenna gain in dBi for a typical SU AU only The available range is from 9 to 20 dBi The default is 10 dBi M AU Antenna Gain The antenna gain in dBi for the AU SU only The available range is from 9 to 20 dBi The default is 10 dBi 4 2 6 2 22 2 3 AU
16. CIR In this formula K is between 0 and 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that influence the performance of the wireless link In some situations the minimum rate CIR cannot be provided This may result from high demand and poor wireless link conditions and or high demand in over subscribed cells When this occurs the actual BreezeACCESS VL System Manual E 4 2 6 6 2 1 4 2 6 6 2 2 4 2 6 6 2 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters information rate is lower than the CIR and IR 1 K CIR where K lt 0 The K value to be used in the cell is advertised by the AU in every beacon and it is changed every second based on comparison of the traffic during the last one second interval with the traffic during the previous one second interval The advertised K value is used by each SU to calculate the amount of data that can be transmitted This algorithm ensures fair resource distribution among SUs based on their configured CIR MIR values The MIR Threshold Percent parameter determines the level of wireless link utilization above which the MIR CIR mechanism is activated A Threshold of 0 allows CIR only A threshold of 100 means MIR only For other values if the actual wireless link utilization is below the threshold K is set to 1 As the link utilization increases above the threshold K is decreased as described above The s
17. Figure 1 1 SU A ODU and IDU Figure 1 2 New SU A ODU For each ODU type several models are available to support various end users needs and applications as detailed in Table 1 5 Table 1 5 SU A E Subscriber Unit Types SU Type Description SU 54 BD SU 54 A high rate CPE that supports a full LAN Not available in the 900 MHz band SU 6 BD SU 6 A medium rate CPE that supports a full LAN Not available in the 900 MHz band SU 3 BD SU 3 An entry level CPE that supports a full LAN SU 1 BD SU 1 An affordable CPE that supports data throughputs of up to 1Mbps SU 8 BD SU A medium rate CPE that supports a full LAN Available only in the 900 MHz band The SU 8 functionality is available by loading the relevant feature license to an SU 3 unit BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 1 System Description Subscriber Unit Table 1 5 SU A E Subscriber Unit Types Continued SU Type Description SU V A medium rate CPE supporting up to 8 Mbps in the uplink and 12 Mbps in the downlink Intended primarily for special applications such as video surveillance where higher uplink rates are required Available currently only with the new SU A ODU in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz bands In the past SU 6 1D units were also available After being upgraded to version 5 0 or higher SU 6 1D units will automatically be changed to SU 6 BD units In the past only SU 3 1D and SU
18. Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Total received frames from wireless The total number of frames received from the wireless medium The count includes data frames as well as control and wireless management frames The count does not include bad frames and duplicate frames For a description of these frames refer to Bad frames received and Duplicate frames discarded below Total received data frames The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Refer to Duplicate frames discarded below Total Rx events The total number of frames that were not received properly The following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the failure Phy The number of Phy errors unidentified signals CRC The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors Overrun The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port Decrypt The number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism Other Total received concatenated frames The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More For more details refer to section Con
19. 193 Table D 1 Cable Color ONE eee ree eer eee ne ee ee eee eee ee 215 Table F 1 Expected Throughput in Mbps TCP Traffic 20 MHz Bandwidth Burst Mode Enabled Concatenation Enabledi a ararnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnunnnnnnunnnenennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnunnnenenennene 235 Table F 2 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level rerrannnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennenenene 235 BreezeACCESS System Manual Chapter 1 System Description In this Chapter Introducing BreezeACCESSVL on page 2 Base Station Equipment on page 4 Subscriber Unit on page 7 DC Power Injector on page 11 SU L Compatibility on page 13 BreezeACCESSVL B amp B 4 9 GHz only on page 14 Networking Equipment on page 15 Management Systems on page 16 Specifications on page 18 1 1 Chapter 1 System Description Introducing BreezeACCESSVL Introducing Breeze ACCESSVL BreezeACCESSVL is a high capacity IP services oriented Broadband Wireless Access system The system employs wireless packet switched data technology to support high speed IP services including fast Internet and Virtual Private Networks BreezeACCESSVL users are provided with a network connection that is always on supporting immediate access to the Internet and other IP services at high data rates The system is designed for cellular like deployment enabling the system architecture to vary in size and structure A system can includ
20. Disable Preferred AU MAC Address SU 00 00 00 00 00 00 none Applicable only when Best AU Support is enabled Cell Distance Mode AU Automatic Maximum Cell Distance AU 0 No Compensation Per SU Distance Learning AU Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters Table 3 1 Basic Parameters Continued Parameter Default Value Comment Maximum Modulation Level SU 8 or the highest value supported according to the country code Not higher than 7 for units with HW revision A Refer to section Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level on page 73 Wi2 IP Address SU 0 0 0 0 none VLAN ID Management 65535 Authentication Algorithm Open System Data Encryption Option Disable Security Mode WEP Default Multicast Key AU Key 1 Default Key SU Key 1 Key 1 to Key 4 00 0 32 zeros meaning no key Availability of security parameters depends on support according to the country code INFORMATION Some parameters are changed to their new values only after reset refer to Appendix E for more details After completing the necessary configuration changes the unit must be reset in order to activate the new configuration 3 1 2 Country Code Selection CAUTION A The selected Country Code must comply with appl
21. Parameters Group Parameter Unit Control parameters Passwords Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode FTP Server IP address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name FTP Password IP Parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address DHCP Option Access to DHCP Security Parameters Authentication Algorithm Default Key SU Data Encryption Mode Default Multicast Key AU Security Mode Key 1 to Key 4 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O O Gp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 3 Parameters that are not changed after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults Continued Parameters Group Parameter Air Interface Parameters ESSID Operator ESSID Option AU Operator ESSID AU Hidden ESSID Option AU Hidden ESSID Support SU Hidden ESSID Timeout SU Cell Distance Mode AU Maximum Cell Distance AU Per SU Distance Learning Option AU Selected Sub Band AU Frequency AU DFS Required by Regulations SU Waiting Option AU Channel Reuse Option AU Radar Activity Assessment Period AU Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period AU Frequency Subset AU ATPC Option AU Transmit Power Maximum Tx Power SU Tx Control AU Best AU Support SU Preferred AU MAC Address SU All Noi
22. Promiscuous Authentication AU only 4 2 6 7 1 Authentication Algorithm The Authentication Algorithm option determines the operation mode of the selected unit The following two options are available HM Open System An SU configured to Open System can only associate with an AU also configured to Open System In this case the authentication encryption algorithm is not used M Shared Key The authentication messages are encrypted An SU configured to use a Shared Key can only be authenticated by an AU configured to use a Shared Key provided the applicable Key which means both the key number and its content in the AU is identical to the key selected as the Default Key in the SU The default is Open System INFORMATION The Shared Key option cannot be selected before at least one Key is defined In the SU a Default Key that refers to a valid Key must be selected The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Authentication Algorithm option Mixed operation is not supported 4 2 6 7 2 Data Encryption Option The Data Encryption Option allows enabling or disabling data encryption When enabled all data frames including frames using management protocols such as Telnet FTP TFTP SNMP DHCP and ICMP are encrypted The default is Disable INFORMATION W The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Data Encryption Option Mixed operation is not supported E A unit with Data Encryp
23. The default value is 0 INFORMATION The Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled 4 2 6 6 3 6 Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters AU To better support delay sensitive and other high priority traffic a set of Wireless Link Prioritization parameters enables configuring parameters that affect the processes of gaining access to the wireless media and of transmitting high low priority packets The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called Inter Frame Spacing IFS This is the time during which the unit determines whether the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism The IFS depends on the type of the next frame to be transmitted as follows MI SIFS Short Inter Frame Spacing is used for certain frames that should be transmitted immediately such as ACK and CTS frames The value of SIFS is 16 microseconds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters MI DIFS Distributed coordination function Inter Frame Spacing is typically used for other frame types when the medium is free If the unit decides that the medium is not free it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time slots as determined by the Contention Window back off algorithm after reaching a decision that the medium has become free DIFS equal SIFS plus AIFS where AIFS is a co
24. The default value is 218 Disassociate AU only The Disassociate feature enables disassociating all SUs associated with the AU or a selected SU This feature is useful during configuration changes enabling to force the SU s to re initiate the association process including the search for the best AU or a preferred AU using the Best AU process without performing a full reset The Disassociate submenu includes two options HM Disassociate All SUs E Disassociate SU By MAC Address to disassociate a selected SU Noise Immunity Control Noise Immunity Control parameters are available only in units with HW Revision C and higher except to the Pulse Detection Sensitivity parameter that is available also in units with HW Revision B The Adaptive Noise Immunity ANI mechanism is designed to reduce the wireless physical layer errors and by that enhance the processing power of the unit delivering higher packet processing efficiency This ANI mechanism is triggered by the rate of detected Physical Errors and it is modifying different thresholds affecting the immunity to specific interference types This feature active by default exists in all units with HW revision C and higher running SW version 3 0 and higher Starting in SW version 4 0 the processing power of the system has been increased dramatically When using version 4 0 the units are capable to process more packets per seconds including physical error packets As a result the ANI m
25. frequency BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 4 2 6 2 5 3 8 4 2 6 2 5 4 4 2 6 2 6 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default is Disable Show DFS Settings And Data Upon selecting the Show DFS Settings and Data the values of all DFS parameters and the current operating frequency will be displayed The current defined frequency subset as well as the defined subset to be used after the next reset are also displayed In addition all the applicable frequencies will be displayed together with their status in the database Radar Free Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar Show Frequency Definitions Upon selecting the Show Frequency Definitions the selected frequencies in the available Sub Bands and the current operating frequency are displayed Best AU Parameters SU An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID may become associated with the first AU it finds not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication The same limitation also exists if only one AU in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU as it is not always necessarily the best choice The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing Changes in base station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput condition
26. must be configured to ensure that the unit operates correctly After the basic parameters have been configured additional parameters can be remotely configured via the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP management or by loading a configuration file Refer to section Working with the Monitor Program on page 81 for information on how to access the Monitor program using Telnet and how to use it The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters necessary for the initial installation and operation of Subscriber and Access Units In many installations most of these parameters should not be changed from their default values The basic parameters and their default values are listed in Table 3 1 Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters Table 3 1 Basic Parameters Parameter Default Value Comment Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode in Unit Control Auto Negotiation Parameters IP Address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 DHCP Options Disable Access to DHCP AU From Ethernet Only SU From Wireless Only ESSID ESSID1 Hidden ESSID Option AU Disable Hidden ESSID Support SU Disable Operator ESSID Option AU Enable Operator ESSID AU ESSID1 Applicable only if Operator ESSID Option is set to Enable Country Code Select Depends on factory configuration Applicable only for 5 4
27. the SU will associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU algorithm Valid values A MAC address string The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 zeros meaning that there is no preferred AU 4 2 6 2 6 4 Show Best AU Parameters and Data The Show Best AU Parameters and Data option displays the applicable information The Neighboring AU Data table displays the following details for each AU with which the unit can communicate HM MAC Address SNR of the received signal RSSI of the received signal Mark The computed quality mark for the AU Full The association load status of the AU It is defined as full if the number of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter An AU whose associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU even if its computed mark is the highest BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 4 2 6 2 7 4 2 6 2 8 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M ESSID The ESSID of the AU In addition to the neighboring AU data table the following information is displayed HM Best AU Support E Preferred AU MAC Address HM Number of Scanning Attempts E Associated AU MAC Address the MAC address of the selected AU Scanning Mode SU only The Scanning Mode parameter defines whether the SU will use Passive or Active s
28. 0 VLAN Priority Management The VLAN Priority Management enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority field for management frames in units with VLAN ID Management that is other than 65535 All management frames are routed to the High queue This parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is 4 for SUs and 0 for AUS VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype Hex The VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype parameter sets the Ethertype of the Service Provider tag and is applicable only for Service Provider Links The valid values are from 8100 to 9000 9100 and 9200 Hex The default value is 8100 Hex VLAN Extended Access SU only The VLAN Extended Access menu allows users to define up to 8 different rules for applying VLAN and priority tags on Ethernet to WLAN traffic Different rules may apply the same VLAN ID BreezeACCESS VL System Manual en Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 1 9 1 VLAN Rule Each rule comprises the following parameters Table 4 17 VLAN Rule Parameters Parameter Description VLAN Rule Defines the type of rule that is going to be applied E noRule No rule is applied Use this option to deactivate a rule that is currently in use E srcMac The rule will be applied on frames with matching source MAC addresses E dstMac The rule will be applied on frames with matching destinati
29. 0 and a given number C each time it wants to access the medium The unit will attempt to access the medium only after a time equal to DIFS for more details refer to section Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS on page 142 plus N time slots always checking if a different unit has accessed the medium before Each time the unit tries to transmit and a collision occurs the maximum number C used for the random number selection will be increased to the next available value The available values are 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 and 1023 The Minimum Contention Window parameter is the first maximum number C used in the back off algorithm The higher the number of SUs served by the same AU the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be In addition when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled the Minimum and Maximum Contention Window parameters can be configured to provide certain units with an advantage over other units The available values are 0 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 and 1023 A value of 0 means that the contention window algorithm is not used and that the unit will attempt to access the medium immediately after a time equal to DIFS The default value is 15 For VL 900 units the default value is 7 CAUTION A A value of 0 disables the contention window back off algorithm It should only be used in point to point applications For more details on configuring units in a point to point link refer to
30. 1 Weight g 190 Connector SMA jack Cable 2 meter 2 x SMA plug 3 6 dB max insertion loss 1 9 6 Environmental Table 1 29 Environmental Specifications Type Unit Details Operating Outdoor units 40 C to 55 C tempejate Indoor equipment 0 C to 409 C Operating humidity Outdoor units 5 95 non condensing weather protected Indoor equipment 5 95 non condensing BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O 28 Chapter 2 Installation In This Chapter Installation Requirements on page 30 Equipment Positioning Guidelines on page 34 Installing the Outdoor Unit on page 35 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit on page 46 Installing the SU I on page 48 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment on page 58 INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this chapter does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESSSU L Product Manual P Chapter 2 Installation Installatio
31. 4 1 5 3 Remove Relaying VLAN ID The Remove Relaying VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Relaying List Valid values are VID values from 1 to 4094 that are included in the VLAN Relaying List 4 2 6 4 1 5 4 Show VLAN ID Relaying List The Show VLAN Relaying option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in the VLAN Relaying List INFORMATION If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is Enabled then all data frames relayed from the wireless link are discarded v If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled then all VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List 4 2 6 4 1 6 VLAN ID Service Provider SU only The Service Provider VLAN ID is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter is set to Service Provider Link It enables defining the Service Provider VLAN ID for data frames which identifies the Service Provider VLAN to which the unit belongs The range is 1 to 4094 The default value is 1 The Service provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the wireless link port as follows BreezeACCESS VL System Manual B amp E Q 4 2 6 4 1 7 4 2 6 4 1 7 1 4 2 6 4 1 7 2 4 2 6 4 1 8 4 2 6 4 1 9 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Both single tagged frames having Service Provider VLAN ID tag and double tagged frames having Service Provider VLAN ID and customer VLA
32. 4 2 6 7 Security Parameters BreezeACCESSVL systems can support encryption of authentication messages and or data frames using one of the following encryption standards M WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy algorithm WEP is defined in the IEEE 802 11 Wireless LAN standard and is based on the RSA s RC4 encryption algorithm M AES OCB Advanced Encryption Standard AES is defined by the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST and is based on Rijndael block cipher AES OCB Offset Code Book is a mode that operates by augmenting the normal encryption process by incorporating an offset value M FIPS 197 is certified for compliance with Federal Information Processing Standards It provides encryption and message integrity in one solution and implements the Advanced Encryption Standard using Rijndael block cipher INFORMATION A FIPS 197 can be supported only in units with HW revision C or higher INFORMATION On SU L AES CCM is compatible with FIPS 197 Select AES CCM on SU L when FIPS 197 is used by the gt AU The following parameters are available through the Security Parameters menu in certain units some or all of the security options may not be available M Authentication Algorithm M Data Encryption Option BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O QD Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Security Mode Default Key SU only E E M Default Multicast Key AU only M Key 1 to Key 4 E
33. 888 53 888 128 53 888 53 888 SU I 128 4 096 4 096 128 6 016 6 016 SU V 128 8 064 8 064 128 12 032 12 032 Table 4 24 CIR Ranges and Defaults Unit Type CIR Uplink CIR Downlink Range Kbps Default Kbps Range Kbps Default Kbps SU 1 0 896 0 0 1024 0 SU 3 0 2 048 0 0 2 048 0 SU 6 0 4 096 0 0 4 096 0 SU 8 0 11 264 0 0 11 264 0 SU 54 0 45 056 0 0 45 056 0 SU I 0 4 096 0 0 6 016 0 SU V 0 8 064 0 0 12 032 0 4 2 6 6 2 5 Maximum Burst Duration Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to the Burst Duration algorithm Available values range from 0 to 2000 milliseconds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 4 2 6 6 2 6 4 2 6 6 2 7 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default value is 5 milliseconds enabling a maximum burst of 0 005 X CIR Kbps after a period of inactivity of 5 milliseconds or more Maximum Delay SU only Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system As certain applications are very sensitive to delay if relatively high delays are permitted these applications may suffer from poor performance due to data accumulation in the buffers from other applications such as FTP The Maximum Delay parameter limits the number of available buffers Data that is delayed more than the permitted maximum delay is discarded If the SU supports applications that are very sensitive to delay the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased Valid valu
34. AU 16 to 160 ms 160 No Max Beacons Lost AU 3 to 64 8 No Installation Model VL 900 E LOS Near LOS No AU SU mi near LOS E Non LOS Minimum Desired VL 900 500 to 6000 kbps 3000 kbps No Performance AU SU Minimum Desired VL 900 500 to 54000 meters 1400 meters No Distance AU SU Channel Selection VL 900 HM Optimize Performance for Optimize Distance No Optimization Criteria AU SU Minimum Desired for Minimum Distance Desired Performance M Optimize Distance for Minimum Desired Performance Scanning Type VL900 M Clear Channel Selection Clear Channel No AU SU Automatic Noise Floor Selection Selection Automatic Noise E Automatic Noise Floor Floor Selection Selection E Clear Channel Selection E Statistics Only AU Height VL 900 15 to 200 meters 30 meters No AU SU SU Antenna Gain VL 900 9 to 20 dBi 10 dBi No AU AU Antenna Gain VL 900 9 to 20 dBi 10 dBi No SU BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time SU Maximum VL 900 1to8 5 No Modulation AU SU AU Maximum VL 900 1to8 8 No Modulation AU SU Keep Link VL 900 M Disable KeepLink Enabled No AU E Enable KeepLink Channel Scan Period VL 900 2 to 30 seconds 5 No AU SU Automatic Scan VL 900 0 disabled or 10 10080 0 disabled No Period AU SU minutes Not applicable if only one Sub Band is available for
35. BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications The following sections provide additional details on the various types of Subscriber Units SU A E Subscriber Units The SU A E Subscriber Unit comprises a desktop or wall mountable Indoor Unit IDU and an outdoor unit that contains the processing and radio modules Several ODU types are available to support a wide range of requirements as detailed in Table 1 4 Table 1 4 Subscriber Unit ODU Types SU ODU Type Description SU A ODU A rectangular enclosure plus a diamond shaped vertically polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel 41 5 x 36 9 x 6 3 cm Available only for HW revision D or lower BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 1 System Description Subscriber Unit Table 1 4 Subscriber Unit ODU Types Continued SU ODU Type Description New SU A ODU A diamond shaped enclosure 22 x 22 x 7 cm witha vertically horizontally polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel The smaller size new SU A ODU HW revision E is currently available only in the 5 4 GHz and 5 8 GHz bands SU E ODU A rectangular enclosure 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 cm with a connection to an external antenna not included Not available in the 0 9 GHz band HW revision D or lower New SU E ODU A diamond shaped enclosure 22 x 22 x 7 cm witha connection to an external antenna not included af
36. Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate E Red No Ethernet connectivity between the indoor and outdoor units SNR BAR Received signal M Red LED Signal is too low SNR lt 4 dB strength Indication 8 green LEDs Quality of the received signal va Nore Mode E Orange LED Signal is too high SNR gt 50 dB Table 3 6 SU ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality In Normal Mode SNR Bar LEDs SNR typical LED 1 red is On Signal is too low SNR lt 4 dB LED 2 green is On SNR gt 4 dB LEDs 2 to 3 green are On SNR gt 8 dB LEDs 2 to 4 green are On SNR gt 13 dB LEDs 2 to 5 green are On SNR gt 19 dB LEDs 2 to 6 green are On SNR gt 26 dB LEDs 2 to 7 green are On SNR gt 31 dB LEDs 2 to 8 green are On SNR gt 38 dB LEDs 2 to 9 green are On SNR gt 44 dB LEDs 2 to 9 green and 10 orange are Signal is too high SNR gt 50 dB On Indoor Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the indoor equipment examine the LED indicators located on the top panel of the SU IDU and AU IDU units or on the front panel of the BS AU module Table 3 7 provides information for the BS AU IDU LEDs Table 3 8 lists the LEDs of the PS1073 IDU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning Operation Verification Table 3 7 BS AU LEDs Name Description Functionality W LINK Wireless link activity E Green At least one SU is
37. DFS Minimum Pulses to Detect Section 4 2 6 2 4 3 6 Parameters Summary Appendix E 4 for FCC 8 for other ETSI SW Version 4 5 July 2007 FCC Radiation Hazard Warning in Legal Rights Updated SW Version 4 5 July 2007 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Usable frequencies limitations Section 4 2 6 2 4 2 Updated SW Version 4 5 July 2007 Re apply Country Code Values Section 4 2 6 8 2 Appendix A New feature SW Version 4 5 July 2007 Basic Parameters Section 4 2 4 Added AP Client IP Address SW Version 4 5 July 2007 DFS Section 4 2 6 2 4 3 1 Name changed from DFS Option to DFS Required by Regulations No Yes SW Version 4 5 July 2007 Sub Band Select in SU Sections 4 2 6 2 5 1 4 2 6 2 14 Added updated descriptions SW Version 4 5 July 2007 MIR CIR Parameters Section 4 2 6 6 2 Improved description SW Version 4 5 August 2007 Frequency Ranges Table 1 1 Table 1 8 The 5 8 GHz band is up to 5 875 GHz actual usable frequencies depend on Country Code SW Version 4 5 August 2007 Antenna specifications Table 1 8 Updated compliance to ETSI standard EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 SW Version 4 5 August 2007 Limitations on usable frequencies in FCC 5 3 GHz band Sections 3 1 2 4 2 6 2 4 2 Updated SW Version 4 5 August 2007 Correct Run Time
38. DFS on the SU for ETSI 5 8 and ETSI 5 4 based country codes are compared in Table 4 6 Table 4 6 DFS Behavior on SUs Using ETSI Based Country Codes Feature ETSI 5 8 based country codes ETSI 5 4 based country codes Applicable E ETSI 5 8 E ETSI 5 4 country codes M Other country codes based on ETSI 5 8 UK 5 8 Germany 5 8 and Universal 5 8 with Detection Algorithm set to ETSI M Other country codes based on ETSI 5 4 ETSI F 5 4 and Universal 5 4 with Detection Algorithm set to ETSI Startup SU checks each frequency and tags it as All frequencies are tagged as Radar either Radar Free or Radar Detected Free by default Operating SU performs In Service Monitoring and SU performs In Service Monitoring Frequency dissasociates when radar is detected and dissasociates when radar is detected Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar Expires after a predefined Channel Avoidance Period The frequency s status Expires after a predefined Channel Avoidance Period The frequency s check for radar before using it to associate frequency is then set to Radar Free but SUs need to status is then set to Radar Free but check for radar before using it to SUs need to check for radar before associate using it to associate Radar Free Expires Afterward the frequency is still No revalidation required SUs may frequency tagged as Radar Free but SUs need to use the frequency to associate at any time 4 2 6
39. HM Disable M Enable IP Precedence RFC791 Prioritization HM Enable DSCP RFC2474 Prioritization The default is Disable IP Precedence Threshold The IP Precedence Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to Enable IP Precedence RFC791 Prioritization If the value of the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold the packet is routed to the High queue If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold the packet will be transferred to the Low queue unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is 4 DSCP Threshold The DSCP Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to Enable DSCP RFC2474 Prioritization If the value of the 6 DSCP bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold the packet is routed to the High queue If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold the packet will be routed to the Low queue unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier Valid values range from 0 to 63 The default value is 32 UDP TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization The UDP TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance with the UDP and or TCP destination port ranges The UDP TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization menu includes the following parameters UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option The UDP TCP P
40. In units with ODU HW revision C and higher the RESET button can be used for setting the unit to its factory defaults Press the button for about 10 seconds until the ETH LED of the IDU stops blinking the unit will reboot with the factory default configuration BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp a Q 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I Installing the SU I The following sections describe how to install the SU I CPE 2 5 1 Installation Requirements 2 5 1 1 Packing List M SU I CPE M Power Adapter M 3 meters Ethernet Cable E WallAwindow mountable detached antenna kit including wall window mounting accessories and a 2 meters SMA SMA M M RF cable only with SU I D 2 5 1 2 Additional Optional Items M Mains plug adapter or termination plug if the power plug on the power adapter not fit local power outlets The Power Adapter is supplied with a North American power plug and an EU power connector adapter M Portable PC with an Ethernet card and a straight Ethernet cable for configuring parameters using either Telnet or AlvariCRAFT for BreezeACCESSVL application TFTP server SW is required for downloading SW versions M Other installation tools and materials means for securing cables to walls etc INFORMATION j Items marked with an asterisk are available from Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp eB Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I 2 5 2 SU I Connectors and LEDs
41. Interference Mitigation can be displayed by reading the Event Log see Event Log Menu on page 95 or by downloading the log file see Appendix B Delete Statistics File Deletes the Interference Mitigation statistics file created during the previous scan A final validation is required prior to deletion E 0 Cancel Operation E 1 Delete File Show Interference Mitigation Parameters amp Data This feature displays a review of the Interference Mitigation settings and the statistics generated during the latest scan if the statistics file was not deleted in the meanwhile These statistics include for each defined channel the following parameters M Frequency E Noise Floor M Achievable Distance HM Maximum Throughput Network Management Parameters The Network Management Parameters menu enables protecting the Unit from unauthorized access by defining a set of discrete IP addresses as well as IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed using protocols such as Telnet FTP TFTP SNMP DHCP and ICMP This excludes management messages generated in the unit such as Traps or Ping Test frames which are not filtered The direction from which management access is permitted can also be configured which means that management access may be permitted from the wireless medium only from the wired Ethernet only or from both The Network Management Menu also enables managing transmission of traps including definition of up to 10 traps
42. MAC Address Database option in the Site Survey menu If the measured SNR is less than a certain threshold it is recommended that the maximum modulation level of the SU be decreased in accordance with Table 4 19 using the values of typical sensitivity It is recommended to add a 2 dB safety margin to compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the link quality INFORMATION The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the applicable SU If necessary use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data transmission When the Adaptive Modulation algorithm is disabled this parameter will serve to determine Fixed Modulation Level used for transmissions BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The minimum and maximum values for the Maximum Modulation Level are defined by the Sub Band in use For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 Currently all Sub Bands support the entire range of modulation levels from 1 to 8 However the highest modulation level supported by units with HW revision A is modulation level 7 The default is the highest supported modulation level 8 for all units with HW revision B or higher 7 for units with HW revision A Table 4 19 Recomm
43. Modulation Level Counters menu includes the following options M Display Counters Select this option to display the current values of the Per Modulation Level Counters HM Reset Counters Select this option to reset the Per Modulation Level Counters The statistics show the number of frames accumulated in different categories since the last reset For SUs the Per Modulation Level Counters display the following information for each modulation level supported by the unit M SUCCESS The total number of successfully transmitted unicasts at the applicable modulation level M FAILED The total number of failures to successfully transmit unicast frame during a HW Retry cycle at the applicable modulation level In addition the Average Modulation Level AML is also displayed This is the average modulation level rounded to the nearest integer since the last time the Per Modulation Level counters were reset The average is calculated using the SUCCESS count at each modulation level as weights For AUs the SUCCESS and FAILED counts are provided for each of the associated SUs which are identified by their MAC address Link Capability The Link Capability option provides information on HW and SW capabilities of relevant units In an AU the information provided in the Link Capability reports is for all associated SUs In an SU the Link Capability reports include information on all AUs in the neighboring AUs table all AUs with whom the SU c
44. ODU A Y cable for connecting directly to the IDU COM of ODUs with a new smaller size enclosure for configuration performance monitoring using a portable PC Additional Installation Requirements The following items are also required to install the BreezeACCESSVL system components M Ethernet cable straight for connecting to a hub switch etc crossed for connecting directly to a PC s NIC Crimping tool for RJ 45 connectors Ground cables with an appropriate termination M Mains plug adapter or termination plug if the power plug on the supplied AC power cord does not fit local power outlets M Portable PC with Ethernet card and Telnet software or AlvariCRAFT for BreezeACCESSVL application and a crossed Ethernet cable M installation tools and materials including appropriate means e g a pole for installing the outdoor unit BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O B Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 2 Indoor to Outdoor Cables INFORMATION The length of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable should not exceed 90 meters The length of the j Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user s equipment together with the length of the Indoor to Outdoor cable should not exceed 100 meters Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers listed in Table 2 4 Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables Table 2 4 Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables M
45. Point and a BreezeACCESS SU ODU that provides backhaul connectivity The Wi2 IP Address parameter enables the installer to configure in the SU the IP address of the WiFi AP connected to it providing availability of the IP address information for remote management of the AP The default Wi2 IP Address is 0 0 0 0 meaning none Bridge Parameters The Bridge Parameters menu provides a series of parameter sets that enables configuring parameters such as control and filtering options for broadcast transmissions VLAN support and Type of Service prioritization The Bridge Parameters menu includes the following options BreezeACCESS VL System Manual e 158 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters VLAN Support Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU only Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Bridge Aging Time Roaming Option SU only Broadcast Multicast Relaying AU only Unicast Relaying AU only MAC Address List AU only 4 2 6 4 1 VLAN Support The VLAN Support menu enables defining the parameters related to the IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN aware Virtual LAN aware feature of the units Each VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other but cannot communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs The VLAN feature also provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames The information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header which is inserted in ea
46. PrevAvgRSSI Hist Weight CrtRSSI 1 HistWeight where E NewAvgRSS New Average RSSI M PrevAvgRSSI Previous Average RSSI M CrtRSSI RSSI of the current packet M HistWeight History Weight The History Weight is given by the next formula HistWeight 0 9 PastTime 25NR_Memory_Factor 4 1 where PastTime time between the current packet and previous packet in seconds SNR Memory Factor the Average SNR Memory Factor configurable parameter see Average SNR Memory Factor on page 181 The SNR_Memory_Factor can be 1 in this case the history is not used and the Average RSSI is the RSSI of the current packet BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O 4 2 5 3 2 4 2 5 3 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The same formula is used also for calculating Average SNR SNR values are used instead of RSSI values Press the Esc key to abort the test Continuous Noise Floor Display The Continuous Noise Floor Display option displays continuously updated information regarding the average noise floor in the wireless link It also displays continuously updated information about the Signal Interference Ratio Signal Interference Ratio SIR is the average SNR for all pulses and physical errors received by the unit The average has the same formula used for calculation of SNR per CPE Click the Esc key to abort the test Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display The Continuous UpLink Qua
47. SNMP submenu enables or disables the transmission of SNMP Traps If this option is enabled up to 10 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent can be defined Starting on SW Version 5 0 traps are generated and sent only by the AU relevant events in an SU are reported by the SU to the serving AU that generates the applicable trap on behalf of the SU For more details on the system traps see the relevant Traps document Send SNMP Traps The Send SNIMP Traps option enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps The default selection is Disable SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses The SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses submenu enables defining up to 10 IP addresses of devices to which the SNMP Traps are to be sent The default of all 10 SNMP Traps IP destinations is 0 0 0 0 SNMP Traps Community The SNMP Traps Community option enables defining the Community name for each IP address to which SNMP Trap messages are to be sent Valid strings Up to 8 ASCII characters The default for all 10 addresses is public which is the default Read community Delete One Trap Address The Delete One Trap Address option enables deleting Trap address entries from the SNMP Traps Addresses list Delete All Trap Addresses The Delete All Trap Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the SNMP Traps Addresses list Wi2 IP Address SU Only The BreezeACCESS WI system comprises a self contained combination of an advanced WiFi Access
48. SU Maximum Modulation MH SU Maximum Modulation The maximum modulation of the SUs in the link The available range is from 1 to 8 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default is 5 MH AU Maximum Modulation The maximum modulation of the AU in the link The available range is from 1 to 8 The default is 8 4 2 6 2 22 2 4KeepLink AU only Use this option to instruct the AU to maintain sufficient fade margin after the Noise Floor selection in order to keep all current associations When this option is enabled the algorithm considers the uplink SNR of all the SUs currently in its Association Database and calculates an upper limit for the Noise Floor When this option is disabled there is no upper limit to the Noise Floor value on the AU except the one imposed by the available range possibly leading to loss of association for the SUs with lower SNR E 0 Disable KeepLink E 1 Enable KeepLink The default is 1 Enabled 4 2 6 2 22 2 5Channel Scan Period The period of time in seconds the unit will stay on each channel to gather information The unit may stop recording prematurely if a 100 000 events limit is reached The available range is from 2 to 30 seconds The default is 5 seconds 4 2 6 2 22 2 6 Automatic Scan Period The period of time in minutes after which the unit will rerun the Interference Mitigation channel scan Setting this value to 0
49. Subnet Mask AU SU IP address 255 0 0 0 No Default Gateway AU SU IP address 0 0 0 0 No Address DHCP Option AU SU Disable Disable No M DHCP Only E Automatic Access to DHCP AU SU Hi From Wireless Only AU From No E From Ethernet Only Ethernet Only E From Both Wireless and Ethernet SU From Wireless Only BreezeACCESS System Manual eS D Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary E 1 3 Air Interface Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time ESSID AU SU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID 1 No characters Operator ESSID AU E Disable Enable No Option M Enable Operator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID 1 No characters Hidden ESSID Option AU E Disable Disable No E Enable Hidden ESSID Support SU E Disable Disable No E Enable Hidden ESSID Timeout SU 1 60 minutes 10 minutes Yes Best AU Support SU E Disable Disable No E Enable Number of Scanning SU 1 255 4 No Attempts Preferred AU MAC SU MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 No Address no preferred AU Scanning Mode SU Passive Active Passive No Cell Distance Mode AU Automatic Manual Automatic No Maximum Cell AU 0 54 Km 0 no compensation Yes Distance 0 means no compensation Fairness Factor AU 0 100 100 No Per SU Distance AU E Disable Disable Yes Learning M Enable Arbitration AU SU 1 50 time slots 2 time slots No Inter Frame Spacing Wire
50. System Manual amp ee 4 2 6 6 3 4 2 6 6 3 1 4 2 6 6 3 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Traffic Prioritization Each packet that is received from the Ethernet port is placed in either the High or Low queue according to the Traffic Prioritization parameters When the MIR CIR mechanism decides that a packet must be sent the High priority queue will be checked first If the High priority queue is not empty the first element in the queue is forwarded to the MIR CIR mechanism Packets from the Low priority queue will be forwarded only if the High queue is empty The prioritization of the packets is done using different classifiers M VLAN Priority E ToS Priority IP Precedence or DSCP M UDP and or TCP ports E Source destination IP address Each one of these classifiers can be activated deactivated If more than one classifier is activated the priority of each packet will be determined by the highest priority given to it by the active classifiers The Traffic Prioritization menu enables activating deactivating each of these classifiers and configuring the applicable parameters for each classifier The Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent parameter can be used to prevent starvation of low priority traffic by ensuring that a certain number of low priority packets is transmitted even at the expense of high priority traffic In addition the Wireless Link Prioritization enables the configuration o
51. Tag Remove Yes to Ethernet BreezeACCESS VL System Manual es Q Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 15 VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU Service Provider Link Action Data Port AU Accept from Single tagged frames Ethernet E if Forwarding is disabled E If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Double tagged frames E if Forwarding is disabled E If Forwarding is enabled only frames with Service Provider VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames E if Forwarding is disabled E If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Double tagged frames E if Forwarding is disabled E If Forwarding is enabled only frames with Service Provider VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Tag Insert No Tag Remove No INFORMATION The following units management limitations apply when using a Service Provider Link M The unit can be managed only with tagged frames VLAN ID Management must be other than 65535 E To enable proper management all units in a cell the AU and all SUs served by it must use the VLAN ID Management M The VLAN ID Management must differ from the Customer s VLAN ID Data 4 2 6 4 1 3 5 Extended Access Link SU onl
52. The Maximum Number of Associations parameter defines the maximum number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the selected AU while still guaranteeing the required quality of service to customers Available values for AU BS and AU SA range from 0 to 512 For AUS BS and AUS SA the range is from 0 to 25 Default value for AU BS and AU SA is 512 For AUS BS and AUS SA the default is 25 INFORMATION The Maximum Number of Associations must be set to a value of 124 or lower to enable Data Encryption As long as Data Encryption is enabled the Maximum Number of Associations cannot be set to a value higher than 124 The Maximum Number of Associations Limit 512 when Data Encryption is disabled 124 when Data Encryption is enabled is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ae 143 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION There is no aging time for SUs An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions M The SU failed to respond to 100 consecutive data frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out M During the last 6 minutes or more the SU did not transmit any data frame and failed to respond to certain frames that typically are transmitted by the AU every 10 seconds Since the sampling interval for this state is about 10 minutes it means that the decision to remove t
53. VLAN Rule Parameters Continued Parameter Description VLAN ID Defines the VLAN ID tag that is going to be applied to untagged frames in the Ethernet to WLAN traffic Also any incoming WLAN traffic tagged with this ID will be routed to Ethernet untagged This parameter must be configured in order to save the rule Valid values range from 1 to 4094 If no value is defined for this entry 0 is returned VLAN Priority Defines the priority tag that is going to be applied to untagged frames in the Ethernet to WLAN traffic This parameter must be configured in order to save the rule Valid values range from 0 to 7 If no value is defined for this entry 255 is returned VLAN Multicast Allowed Defines whether multicast frames are filtered when applying the rule The available options are E 0 Multicast frames not allowed M 1 Multicast frames allowed The default value is 0 This setting applies only to Layer 2 multicast frames It does not apply to Layer 2 broadcast frames or to Layer 3 broadcast or multicast frames For more information on this topic see Table 4 18 VLAN Rule Data Type Defines the type of data that is defined in the VLAN Rule Data field The available options are E 1 Value A single value is entered E 2 Range A range of consecutive values is entered by typing the first and the last value in the range separated by a space or by a minus symbol E 3 Mask An address mask pair
54. alignment using the SNR bar display or the Continuous Average SNR RSSI Display is possible only after the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit The associated Access Unit must be operational and the basic Subscriber Unit parameters must be correctly configured Otherwise the unit will not be able to synchronize with the Access Unit As the SNR measurement is performed on received frames its results are meaningless unless the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit i To align the Subscriber Unit antenna I Align the antenna by pointing it in the general direction of the Base Station SO 2 Verify that the power indication of the unit L J is On 3 Verify that the W LINK LED h of the ODU is On indicating that the unit is associated with an Access Unit If the W LINK LED is Off check that the ESSID and Frequency parameters are correctly configured If the SU is still not associated with the AU increase the transmit power level to its maximum value If the unit is still not associated with the AU improve the quality of the link by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a higher or alternate location 4 Rotate the antenna until the maximum SNR reading is achieved where at least 1 green LED is on If you encounter prolonged difficulty in illuminating the minimum required number of green LEDs try to improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in an alter
55. and 5 8 GHz units See Country Code Selection on page 67 below BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters Table 3 1 Basic Parameters Continued Parameter Default Value Comment Sub Band Select AU 1 Applicable only if more than one Sub Band is available Frequency AU The lowest frequency in the selected Sub Band User Defined Frequency Subsets SU All frequencies DFS Required By Regulation if DFS is supported by Country Code Depends on Country Code Frequency Subset Definition AU if DFS is supported All frequencies Applicable only if DFS is enabled DFS Detection Algorithm for Universal Country Code in 5 4 or 5 8 GHz band ETSI Applicable only if DFS is enabled Transmit Power Dependent on HW revision unit type and Sub Band Transmit Power in SU cannot be higher than the Maximum Tx Power parameter Maximum Tx Power SU Dependent on HW revision and Sub Band Maximum Tx Power cannot be higher than the upper limit according to the Sub Band In Use Tx Power AU On Antenna Gain units with external antenna According to the antenna supplied with the unit and the If set to Not Set Yet must be configured according to actual value taking into account cable s attenuation Sub Band ATPC Option Enable ATPC Option for SU L Disable Best AU Support SU
56. be used during Spectrum Analysis see Spectrum Analysis on page 144 It has no affect on the frequencies to be used during regular operation which are defined using the User Defined Frequency Subsets menu described below For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 The range depends on the number of Sub Bands supported by the country code The default selection is Sub Band 1 User Defined Frequency Subsets The User Defined Frequency Subsets menu enables defining for each of the available Sub Bands the frequencies that will be used by the SU when scanning for an AU For each available Sub Band the available frequencies are displayed and an index is associated with each frequency Enter either the BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters desired frequency indexes A All for using all frequencies in the subset or N None for not scanning that sub band The default is all frequencies in all available sub bands 4 2 6 2 5 3 DFS Parameters The DFS Parameters submenu is available only if DFS is supported by the current Sub Band Note that starting on SW version 5 2 the DFS feature is supported although disabled by default for units using Country Codes 1060 and 1064 Universal 5 4 GHz and Universal 5 8 GHz When a
57. change to take effect The license string comprises 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits INFORMATION a If you are entering the license string using copy and paste operation check carefully that the string is copied properly You may have to enter it manually due to potential problems in performing copy and paste in Telnet New Feature License files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP see Appendix B 4 2 3 11 SW Version Download The SW Version Download submenu enables the optional downloading of a SW Version file from a remote FTP server The SW Version Download submenu includes the following options M Execute FTP GET SW Version The Execute FTP GET SW Version option executes the SW Version FTP download according to the parameters defined below E FTP SW Source Dir The FTP SW Source Dir option enables defining the source directory of the SW version file Valid values A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters To clear the field press The default is an empty string E FTP SW Version File Name The FTP SW Version File Name option enables defining the name of the SW version file in the FTP server Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed The default is VxWorks bz BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters E FTP Server IP Address The FTP Server IP Address option enables defining the IP address of the FTP server
58. country code New SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 Table 3 2 DFS mechanism update Section 4 2 6 2 3 DFS mechanism was updated for ETSI based country codes SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 Traffic Prioritization Section 4 2 6 6 3 WLP available free of charge SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 10 MHz bandwidth support for SU L Section 1 5 Removed SU L 10 MHz bandwidth limitation SW Version 5 5 20 July 2009 VLAN Extended Access and Extended Trunk modes Section 4 2 6 4 1 Added Extended Access and Extended Trunk link types for VLAN on SUs SW Version 5 6 3 August 2009 Radio Specifications Table 1 1 Updated the 0 9 GHz band frequencies SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Radio Specifications Updated 0 9 GHz band SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Table 1 8 frequency range and central frequency resolution LED Mode LEDs behavior can be SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Section 4 2 3 13 customized Maximum TX Power Table 4 9 Updated maximum TX power for VL 900 units SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Interference Mitigation Section 4 2 6 2 22 Added Interference Mitigation functionality for VL 900 units SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Adaptive Modulation Section 4 2 6 5 10 Updated Adaptive Modulation algorithm SW Version 6 0 October 2009 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Proportional IR Fac
59. destination IP addresses and the associated community strings In addition the menu enables specifying the IP address of a connected AP client device to facilitate remote management of a BreezeACCESS WI system The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options M Access to Network Management M Network Management Filtering M Set Network Management IP address Oo Delete a Network Management IP Address BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Delete All Network Management IP Addresses M Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges E SNMP Traps AU only Wi IP Address SU only 4 2 6 3 1 Access to Network Management The Access to Network Management option defines the port through which the unit can be managed The following options are available M From Wireless Link Only E From Ethernet Only M From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The default selection is From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link CAUTION Be careful not to block your access to the unit For example if you manage an SU via the wireless link setting the Access to Network Management parameter to From Ethernet Only completely blocks your A management access to the unit In this case a technician may be required to change the settings at the user s site 4 2 6 3 2 Network Management Filtering The Network Management Filtering option enables or disables the IP address based
60. detecting radar activity These frequencies will not be used when searching for a new frequency When this time has elapsed the unit frequency s marking will change to Radar Free The range is 1 to 60 minutes The default is 30 minutes 4 2 6 2 4 3 5 SU Waiting Option The SU Waiting Option defines whether the disassociation message sent by the AU after detecting radar activity on the current frequency will include a message instructing the SU to search only for the AU before attempting to search for another AU The message includes also the time period during which the SU should not search for any other AU The waiting time is the Channel Check Time plus 5 seconds The default is Enable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O 127 4 2 6 2 4 3 6 4 2 6 2 4 3 7 4 2 6 2 4 3 8 4 2 6 2 4 3 9 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Minimum Pulses to Detect The Minimum Pulses to Detect parameter defines the minimum number of radar pulses that should be detected before reaching a decision that radar is active on the channel The range is from 1 to 100 pulses The default is 4 pulses Channel Reuse Parameters DFS The Channel Reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under certain conditions that indicate low radar activity on the original channel The conditions are that radar was detected in this channel not more than N times Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period during the la
61. either Enable Only for TCP or Enable for both UDP and TCP All packets whose destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue All other packets will be routed to the Low queue unless they were assigned a High priority by another classifier BreezeACCESS VL System Manual E 197 4 2 6 6 3 4 4 2 6 6 3 4 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The TCP Port Ranges menu includes the following options M TCPRTP RTCP Prioritization Voice over IP is transported using Real Time Protocol RTP The Real Time Control Protocol RTCP is used to control the RTP When an application uses RTP RTCP it chooses for destination ports consecutive numbers RTP port is always an even number and the port with the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets then all the packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High priority if the port number is included in the specified ranges If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets then all packets whose destination port number is included in the specified ranges will receive High priority The available options are RIP amp RTCP RTP Only The default is RTP amp RTCP Add TCP Port Ranges This option enables adding TCP port ranges to the list of prior
62. evaluating performance and identifying potential problems In the AU there is also an extensive database for all SUs served by it The Site Survey menu includes the following options Traffic Statistics Ping Test MAC Address Database Link Quality SU only Oo a E Oo M Hidden ESSID Table SU only M Continuous Noise Floor Display AU only M Per Modulation Level Counters E Link Capability Traffic Statistics The traffic statistics are used to monitor interpret and analyze the performance of the wired and wireless links The counters display statistics relating to wireless link and Ethernet frames The Traffic Statistics menu includes the following options M Display Counters Select this option to display the current value of the Ethernet and wireless link WLAN counters HM Reset Counters Select this option to reset the counters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 4 2 5 1 1 4 2 5 1 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Ethernet Counters The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards the frames to its internal bridge which determines whether each frame should be transmitted to the wireless medium Frames discarded by the unit s hardware filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters For units with HW revision B and lower the maximum length of a regular IEEE 802 1 Ethernet packet that can be accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port is
63. it receives transmissions from the specific SU The average calculation takes into account the previous calculated average thus reducing the effect of short temporary changes in link conditions The weight of history the previous value in the formula used for calculating the average SNR is determined by a configurable parameter In addition the higher the time that has passed since the last calculation the lower the impact of history on the calculated average If the average SNR is not in the configured target range the AU transmits to the SU a power up or a power down message The target is that each SU will be received at an optimal level or as high or low as possible if the optimal range cannot be reached because of specific link conditions BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp E 4 2 6 2 8 1 4 2 6 2 8 1 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Each time that the SU tries to associate with the AU following either a reset or loss of synchronization it will initiate transmissions using its Transmit Power parameters If after a certain time the SU does not succeed to synchronize with the AU it will start increasing the transmit power level In an AU the maximum supported transmit power is typically used to provide maximum coverage However there may be a need to decrease the transmitted power level in order to support relatively small cells and to minimize the interference with the operation of neighbori
64. manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s own expense FCC Radiation Hazard Warning To comply with FCC RF exposure requirement the antenna used for this transmitter must be fixed mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 2 meter from al persons for antennas with a gain up to 28 dBi Antenna Compliance Statement This device has been tested and certified to operate with the limited list of antennas detailed in Table 1 3 It is hereby expressly clarified that installation and usage of any other antennas shall be under the sole responsibility and liability of the client It is the responsibility of the client to assure that such installation and usage is in full compliance with the applicable local laws and regulations including without limitation with respect to the maximum permitted radiated power The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power EIRP is not more than that permitted for successful communication R amp TTE Compliance Statement This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Safe
65. marked accordingly and will be processed according to the following M lf there is no concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit in the queue If the hardware queue is empty the frame is transmitted immediately Otherwise the queue is not empty the frame is inserted to the queue as a concatenated frame M lf a concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit exists in the queue If the combined size of both frames is above the maximum allowed concatenated frame size both frames are transmitted as two separate frames Otherwise the combined frames size is below the maximum size the new frame is added to the concatenated frame If the number of data frames in the concatenated frame has reached the maximum allowed applicable only if the destination unit uses SW version 3 0 or 3 1 the concatenated frame will be transmitted to the wireless medium Otherwise the concatenated frame remains in the queue until the hardware queue becomes free INFORMATION When a frame is marked as a candidate for concatenation it will be transmitted as a concatenated frame If it is not bundled with another data frame before transmission it will be a concatenated frame with a single data frame Concatenated Frame Single If it is bundled with two or more data frames it will be a concatenated frame with either double data frames Concatenated Frame Double or more data frames Concatenated Frame More The Concaten
66. minutes The default is 5 minutes Bridge Aging Time The Bridge Aging Time parameter enables selecting the bridge aging time for learned addresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides not including BreezeACCESSVL units The available range is 20 to 2000 seconds The default value is 300 seconds Broadcast Multicast Relaying AU only The Broadcast Multicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs relaying of broadcasts and or multicasts The available options are H Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 4 2 6 4 6 4 2 6 4 7 4 2 6 4 7 1 4 2 6 4 7 2 4 2 6 4 7 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters E Broadcast Multicast Enable E Broadcast Enable M Multicast Enable If broadcast multicast relaying if disabled these packets are sent only to the local wired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link When broadcast and or multicast relaying is enabled the relevant packets broadcasts only multicasts only or both broadcasts and multicasts originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices as well as to the wired LAN The default selection is Broadcast Multicast Enable Unicast Relaying AU only The Unicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs unicast relaying When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled unicast packets originating from devices on the wirele
67. months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser the Warranty Period Alvarion will at its sole option and as Purchaser s sole remedy repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion standard R amp R procedure b With respect to the Firmware Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD a The Product is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RE
68. not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is y enabled The available values range is from 1 to 14 The default value is 10 4 2 6 5 9 Burst Mode Burst mode provides an increased throughput by reducing the overhead associated with transmissions in the wireless medium In a burst transmission the inter frame spacing is reduced and unicast data frames are transmitted without any contention period burst mode is not activated on broadcasts multicasts BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Ko a Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The Burst Mode is available only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub Band in use For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 In AUs with HW Revision B or lower Burst Mode cannot be activated when DFS is used In AUs with HW Revision B or lower the Burst Mode option will be blocked upon trying to enable Burst Mode when DFS is enabled This limitation does not apply to AUs with HW Revision C In SUs and AUs with HW Revision B or lower Burst Mode cannot be activated when using WEP for data encryption In units with HW Revision B or lower the Burst Mode option will be blocked upon trying to enable it when using WEP for data encryption This limitation does not apply to units with HW Revision C INFORMATION The Bu
69. of entries is typed separated by a space or comma symbol The subnet defined in this manner will be the applicable domain for the rule E 4 Enum A set of values is typed separated by comma symbols The default setting is Value BreezeACCESS VL System Manual E 170 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 17 VLAN Rule Parameters Continued Parameter Description VLAN Rule Data Defines the actual value s of the parameters defined in the VLAN Rule and VLAN Rule Data Type fields Depending on the type of parameter the following rules apply E MAC addresses The following types of inputs are supported Value Range Mask MAC addresses must be typed in hexadecimal format All symbols must be adjacent to each other No separators are allowed inside the address representation The default setting is 00 00 00 00 00 00 E IP addresses The following types of inputs are supported Value Range Mask The default setting is 0 0 0 0 E Port numbers The following types of inputs are supported Value Range Enum The default setting is 0 E IP protocols The following types of inputs are supported Value Enum Each IP protocol is indicated by its protocol number assigned in accordance with the IANA Allocation Guidelines for the Protocol Field RFC 5237 The default setting is 0 Save VLAN Rule Once all the parameters have been set up use this option to apply
70. or antennas Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines M The outdoor unit can be either pole or wall mounted Its location should enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing M The higher the placement of the antenna the better the achievable link quality M ODU units without an integral antenna should be installed as close as possible to the antenna to ensure that the antenna s characteristics are not affected by the ODU the distance must be higher than 10 cm M The antenna connected to the AU ODU unit should be installed so as to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units SUs within its service area INFORMATION The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas serving adjacent sectors is 2 meters The recommended minimum distance between two antennas serving opposite cells installed back to back is 5 meters M The antenna of the SU integrated or external should be installed to provide a direct or near line of sight with the Base Station antenna The antenna should be aligned to face the Base Station M in some cases it might be necessary to up down tilt the antenna An optional Tilt accessory for the ODU providing a tilt range of 15 is available from Alvarion The tilt option might be necessary to either improve the link conditions or if the SU is too close to the Base Station to reduce the receive signals strength As a rule of thumb if the SU is lo
71. permitted number of retransmissions This count includes dropped data frames as well as dropped control and wireless management frames M Total retransmitted frames The total number of retransmissions including all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions E Total transmitted concatenated frames The total number of concatenated frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More For more details refer to section Concatenation Parameters on page 186 M Total Tx events The total number of transmit events Typically transmission events include cases where transmission of a frame was delayed or was aborted before completion The following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for and the nature of the event Dropped The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted number of retransmissions Underrun The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability Others The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other counters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 4
72. reset via SNMP or by disconnecting reconnecting power If you forgot the password type h at the Access Level selection prompt Type Recover at the prompt to get a challenge string consisting of 8 characters Contact Alvarion s Customer Service and give them the challenge string after user identification to receive a one time password After entering this password at the prompt the unit will reboot with the default Administrator password private Three consecutive errors in entering the one time password will invalidate it and block the monitor program A new challenge string should be used to receive a new one time password 5 Enter your password and press Enter The Main Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 4 1 The unit type and location if configured SW version number and SW release date displayed in the Main Menu vary according to the selected unit and SW version BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O D 81 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Working with the Monitor Program Figure 4 1 Main Menu Administrator Level INFORMATION If the Telnet session is not terminated properly for example if you simply close the window the monitor program is blocked for several minutes To enable access to the monitor program during that time the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting reconnecting power The display of the Main Menu varies depending on the user s access level as follows IM For users
73. section Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS on page 142 4 2 6 5 3 Maximum Contention Window The Maximum Contention Window parameter defines the upper limit for the maximum number C used in the back off algorithm as described in Minimum Contention Window above The available values are 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 and 1023 The default value is 1023 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 178 4 2 6 5 4 4 2 6 5 5 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters For VL 900 units the default value is 31 Multicast Modulation Level AU only The Multicast Modulation Level parameter defines the modulation level used for transmitting multicast and broadcast data frames Multicast and broadcast transmissions are not acknowledged therefore if a multicast or broadcast transmission is not properly received there is no possibility of retransmitting It is recommended that you set a lower modulation level for broadcast and multicast frame transmissions to increase the probability that they are received without errors The Multicast Modulation Level parameter is applicable only to data frames Beacons and other wireless management and control frames are always transmitted at the lowest modulation level according to the Sub Band The minimum and maximum values for the Multicast Modulation Level are defined by the Sub Band in use For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the s
74. surges and static charges In any event Alvarion is not liable for any injury damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation grounding or lightning protection Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste Pursuant to the WEEE EU Directive electronic and electrical waste must not be disposed of with unsorted waste Please contact your local recycling authority for disposal of this product BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Q Important Notice Important Notice This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions M This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products M No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd M The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice M The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license M Information in this document is subject to change without notice M Corporate and individua
75. the direction For installation instructions see Wall Mount with Rotation Capability on page 53 Simple window mounting accessories enabling installation on a glass window without any capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Window Mount on page 55 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O od Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I E Window mounting kit with rotation capability enabling installation on a glass window with rotation capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Window Mount with Rotation Capability on page 56 INFORMATION Ensure that the antenna is mounted vertical to the floor with the connector facing downward and the front of the antenna facing to the exterior of the building preferably directed towards the Base Station CAUTION A In order to avoid damage from lightning strikes the antenna must be placed below roof level 2 5 5 1 Wall Mount The installation kit includes 2 plastic anchors and 2 8 screws I If anchors are needed wall board plaster board etc drill two holes for the anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors Use a 9 64 drill bit for screwing directly into a solid surface stud 2 Fasten the antenna to the wall Refer to Figure 2 15 for directions Use the two 8 screws provided with the kit Do not over tighten 3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bo
76. the standard Factory Defaults configuration excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Parameters not changed after Set Complete Factory Operator Defaults Parameters Group Parameter Unit Control Parameters All Passwords FTP Server IP address see note below FTP Gateway IP address see note below FTP User Name see note below FTP Password see note below Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode Air Interface Parameters Selected Sub Band AU Frequency AU DFS Required by Regulations Frequency Subset AU Antenna Gain AU Country Code Parameters Selected Country Code INFORMATION The FTP parameters are not set to their default values after Set Complete Operator Defaults However they are set to their default value after Set Complete Factory Defaults Note that in this case they are set to the default values immediately upon selecting the Set Complete Factory Default option even before the next reset 4 2 3 2 1 2 Set Partial Factory Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Default configuration excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and management access The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Factory Defaults are listed in Table 4 3 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 20 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 3 Parameters that are not changed after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults
77. to wireless Tag Remove Yes to Ethernet Table Legend E VID D VLAN ID Data M PID D VLAN Priority Data 4 2 6 4 1 3 2 Trunk Link Trunk Link transfers only tagged frames as all devices connected to the unit are VLAN aware Only tagged data frames received on the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded CAUTION It is not recommended that you configure a unit as a Trunk Link with the VLAN ID Management parameter set at 65535 as it does not forward any NO VLAN management frames to its other port A making it impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured with NO VLAN If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled a data frame received with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Forwarding List is discarded INFORMATION If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled be sure to include the VLAN ID Management value of all pe units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit in the Forwarding List If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU a data frame relayed with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Relaying List is discarded INFORMATION f the VLAN Relaying option is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit be sure to include the VLAN ID Management value of all units to be managed when relaying via the wireless port of the AU unit in the Relaying List If the VLAN Forwarding option is also enabled in the
78. update of Unit Control Parameters Appendix E Parameters Summary Section E 1 1 FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name FTP Password are updated in run time reset not required SW Version 5 0 November 2007 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Correct Run Time update of Air Interface Parameters Appendix E Parameters Summary Section E 1 3 Preferred AU MAC Address Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing Wireless Trap Threshold are not updated in run time reset is required Sub Band Select Frequency DFS Required by Regulations Frequency Subset Definition Channel Check Time Channel Avoidance Period SU Waiting Option Minimum Pulses to Detect Channel Reuse Option Radar Activity Assessment Period Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period are updated in run time reset is not required Spectrum Analysis parameters are applicable in run time configured per test SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Correct Run Time update of Service Parameters Appendix E Parameters Summary Section E 1 7 MIR Downlink MIR Uplink CIR Downlink CIR Uplink Maximum Burst Duration MIR Threshold Percent are updated in run time reset is not required SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Send Traps Section 4 2 6 3 7 Traps are generated and sent only by AU including traps on behalf of associated SUs
79. will be allocated to the High Priority queue BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ea Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters HM Source or Destination IP Prioritization Frames with either source or destination IP addresses within the IP range will be allocated to the High Priority queue 4 2 6 6 3 4 2 IP Range Address This option defines the base IP address which in conjunction with the range mask defines the IP range used for prioritization The values are entered as 4 groups of up to 3 digits separated by dots The default value is 0 0 0 0 4 2 6 6 3 4 3 IP Range Mask This option defines the range mask which in conjunction with the base IP address defines the IP range used for prioritization The values are entered as 4 groups of up to 3 digits separated by dots The default value is 255 0 0 0 4 2 6 6 3 5 Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent This feature ensures that a certain amount of low priority packets specified by the Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent LPTMP parameter is transmitted even at the expense of high priority traffic The mechanism guarantees a low priority traffic with a rate of LPTMP RT 100 where RT symbolizes the allowed traffic rate The high priority traffic will thus not be able to exceed 100 LPTMP RT 100 If the system receives high priority traffic at a rate higher than this figure some high priority packets will be discarded The range is between 0 and 100
80. 007 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Station Allowed Option Section 4 2 6 4 7 4 2 6 4 7 4 Parameters Summary Appendix E New feature SW Version 4 5 June 2007 With Regulations Section 3 1 2 Antenna Compliance Statement New SW Version 4 5 June 2007 in Legal Rights Transmit Power Compliance New SW Version 4 5 June 2007 MIB Appendix previously Appendix E Removed all information is available in the MIB text file SW Version 4 5 June 2007 Minimum and Maximum Contention Window parameters Run Time Update definition Parameters Summary Appendix E Parameters are not Run Time Updated reset required SW Version 4 5 June 2007 Maximum uplink data rate of SU I has been changed Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Parameters Summary Appendix E Maximum values of Uplink CIR and MIR and default value of Uplink MIR has been changed from 2048 Kbps to 4096 Kbps SW Version 4 5 July 2007 SU aging mechanism removal from Association Database Sections 4 2 2 1 4 2 5 4 1 4 2 6 212 Updated SW Version 4 5 July 2007 Pulse Detection Sensitivity Section 4 2 6 2 17 5 Parameters Summary Appendix E Default has been changed to Low SW Version 4 5 July 2007 Range of supported modulation levels Sections 4 2 6 5 4 4 2 6 5 5 Updated description SW Version 4 5 July 2007 Default value of
81. 02 dBm M 10 MHz bandwidth 99 dBm E 20 MHz bandwidth 96 dBm Show Noise Floor Calculation Select this option to view the current values of the Noise Floor Calculation parameters and the Noise Floor Current Value the actual current value used by the device Calibration of Noise Floor Indication The Calibration of Noise Floor Indication feature has been introduced to overcome possible inaccuracies in the Noise Floor Calculation mechanism The calibrated Noise Floor Indication is used for correcting the displayed Noise Floor values versus the values that are calculated used by the internal noise floor calculation mechanism BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ee 4 2 6 2 19 1 4 2 6 2 19 2 4 2 6 2 19 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The Calibration of Noise Floor Indication submenu includes the following options Run Calibration Select the Run Calibration option to perform a new calibration process Typically this should be performed for a new unit when Factory calibration is not available whenever the bandwidth sub band is being changed or if the previous calibration process has failed Calibration can be performed only under the following conditions HM The Spectrum Analyser is not in progress Mi There is no active TFTP or FTP session M In an SU only if the SU is associated If the calibration has started the unit will reset itself will perform the calibration and after that it
82. 1 client MIB II Bridge MIB Private BreezeACCESSVL MIB Allocation of IP parameters Configurable or automatic DHCP client Software upgrade E FTP E TFTP Configuration upload download M l FTP E TFTP 1 9 4 Standards Compliance General Table 1 11 Standards Compliance General Type Standard EMC E FCC Part 15 class B E ETSI EN 301 489 1 Safety M UL60950 1 E EN 60950 1 Environmental Operation M ETS 300 019 part 2 3 class 3 2E for indoor M ETS 300 019 part 2 4 class 4 1E for outdoor Storage ETS 300 019 2 1 class 1 2E Transportation ETS 300 019 2 2 class 2 3 Lightning protection AU ODU Antenna connection EN 61000 4 5 Class 3 2kV Radio E ETSI EN 301 893 M ETSI EN 302502 E FCC Part 15 247 E FCC part15 407 E FCC part 90 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description Specifications 1 9 5 Physical and Electrical 1 9 5 1 SU A E Subscriber Unit INFORMATION In the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz band the equipment may be shipped with a new smaller size SU A ODU that supports both horizontal and vertical polarization 1 9 5 1 1 Mechanical Table 1 12 Mechanical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit Unit Structure Dimensions Weight cm kg General An IDU indoor unit and an ODU outdoor unit with an integral antenna or a connection to an external antenna IDU PS1073 Plastic box black deskt
83. 10dBm up to a maximum of 50 dBi If Regulation Max EIRP is No Limit the upper limit is 50 dBi A value of Don t Care means that the actual value is not important A value of Not Set Yet means that the unit will not transmit until the actual value in the range 0 to 50 is configured The unit can be configured to Don t Care or Not Set Yet only in factory when upgraded to SW version 2 0 from a lower version it will be set automatically to one of these options Once a value is configured it is not possible to reconfigure the unit to either Don t Care or Not Set Yet The default value depends on unit type In SUs with integral antenna it is set to 21 read only The default value for AUs that are supplied with a detached antenna is in accordance with the antenna s gain In units supplied without an antenna the default is typically Not Set Yet Cell Distance Parameters AU only The higher the distance of an SU from the AU that is serving it the higher the time it takes for messages sent by one of them to reach the other To ensure appropriate services to all SUs regardless of their distance from the AU while maintaining a high overall performance level two parameters should be adapted to the distances of SUs from the serving AU M The time that a unit waits for a response message before retransmission ACK timeout should take into account the round trip propagation delay between the AU and the SU The one way propagation Bree
84. 128 MIR Uplink SU only Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up link from the SU to the AU The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 23 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 CIR Downlink SU only Sets the Committed Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 24 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp E Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 4 2 6 6 2 4 CIR Uplink SU only Sets the Committed Information Rate of the uplink from the SU to the AU The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 24 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 Table 4 23 MIR Ranges and Defaults Unit MIR Uplink MIR Downlink Type Range Kbps Default Kbps Range Kbps Default Kbps SU 1 128 896 896 128 1024 1024 SU 3 128 2 048 2 048 128 3 072 3 072 SU 6 128 4 096 4 096 128 6 016 6 016 SU 8 128 13 440 13 440 128 13 440 13 440 SU 54 128 53
85. 1514 bytes excluding CRC and VLAN s For units with HW revision C and higher the maximum length of an Ethernet packet that can be accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port excluding CRC is 1600 bytes including VLAN s for single or double tagged packets The unit transmits valid data frames received from the wireless medium to the Ethernet port as well as internally generated frames such as responses to management queries and pings received via the Ethernet port The Ethernet Counters include the following statistics E Total received frames via Ethernet The total number of frames received from the Ethernet port This counter includes both invalid frames with errors and valid frames without errors E Transmitted wireless to Ethernet The number of frames transmitted by the unit to the Ethernet port These are generally frames received from the wireless side but also include frames generated by the unit itself WLAN Counters The unit submits data frames received from the Ethernet port to the internal bridge as well as self generated control and wireless management frames After a unicast data frame is transmitted the unit waits for an acknowledgement ACK message from the receiving unit Some control and wireless management frames as well as broadcast and multicast frames sent to more than one unit are not acknowledged If an ACK is not received after a predefined time which is determined by the Maximum Cell distance par
86. 2 June 2008 File Loading Appendix B Updated A known parameter with a value that is invalid or out of range will be ignored SW Version 5 2 June 2008 Ethernet Port Connection Problems Section F 1 Updated SW Version 5 2 June 2008 Packing Lists Section 2 1 1 Updated clarified that RF cable is not supplied with SU AU E ODUSs SW Version 5 2 June 2008 Antenna Alignment Updated and improved SW Version 5 2 July 2008 Section E 1 7 Section 3 3 Equipment Positioning Minimum distance of 10 cm SW Version 5 2 July 2008 Guidelines between the ODU and antenna Section 2 2 Compatibility with New SW Version 5 5 October 2008 BreezeACCESSEZ SUs Section 1 5 Radio standards updated Updated SW Version 5 5 October 2008 Table 1 11 SU 1 BD added New SW Version 5 5 October 2008 Table 1 5 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Table F 1 SU 1 BD added New SW Version 5 5 October 2008 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued SU L units New SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 Section 1 3 1 5 DC Power Injector New SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 Section 1 4 AU Ant 5G 17 90 antenna for New SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 4 9 GHz Table 1 8 FIPS 197 certification now free Updated SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 Table 1 10 EN 60950 1 and FCC part 90 New SW Version 5 5 20 April 2009 compliance Table 1 11 Brazil 4 9 GHz
87. 2 3 2 3 Channel shutdown Before ceasing transmission on the frequency where radar signals had been detected the AU sends a special disassociation message to its associated SUs This message includes an indication whether the SUs should wait for this AU If the SUs should wait the message includes also the waiting time During this time each SU searches for the AU in the defined frequencies subset If the AU was not found within BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters the waiting time or if a waiting request was not included in the message the SU starts searching for any AU using the Best AU mechanism if applicable On sectors where SUs have the DFS functionality enabled it is possible to trigger a channel shutdown even if the AU hasn t detected any radar activity on that channel If an AU receives from the SUs a particular number of DFS notifications Remote Radar Event Reports in a specified period of time Remote Radar Events Monitoring Period it will initiate a channel shutdown on that frequency and tag it as Radar Detected Typically operators prefer to preserve the original frequency planning and to avoid moving to a new channel unless they are sure that there is a continuous radar activity in the original channel It should be noted that detection of radar activity does not necessarily indicate a continuous radar activity in the channel A channel reuse algorithm enables r
88. 3 4D were available After being upgraded to version 5 0 or higher SU 3 1D 4D units will automatically be changed to SU 3 BD units In SNMP these units will be reported as SU 3 4D However all SU 3 units running SW version 5 0 or higher will behave as SU 3 BD units supporting a full LAN The IDU provides the interface to the user s equipment and is powered from the 110 240 VAC mains The customer s data equipment is connected via a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10 100BaseT RJ 45 interface The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units and also transfers power 54 VDC and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit 1 3 2 SU I Subscriber Units The SU I is a compact Subscriber Unit intended for indoor installations by a non professional user The SU I connects to a detached wall window mountable antenna and is available in the following configura tions Table 1 6 SU I Subscriber Units SU I Configuration Description SU I D All indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN and a wall window antenna kit SU I E All indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN antenna not included The SU I is currently available in the 5 4 GHz and 5 8 GHz bands BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Q eo Chapter 1 System Description Subscriber Unit INFORMATION It is recommended to pre config
89. 4 12 VLAN Data Port Functionality Trunk LinK ruevnnnnnnnnnnnnvnvnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 163 Table 4 13 VLAN Data Port Functionality Hybrid Link ernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnr 163 Table 4 14 VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU Service Provider Link rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 164 Table 4 15 VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU Service Provider LINK cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165 Table 4 16 Extended Trunk Frame Routing revnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 166 Table 4 17 VLAN Rule Parameters Luassseaneneseanemneaems eat bremebvnjkan 169 Table 4 18 Layer 2 Broadcast Multicast Frames Behavior rrvrnnnnnrnrvvnnnnnnnnrvrnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnenreer 171 Table 4 19 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnenen 180 Table 4 20 Basic Rate MESEN ea hanatodaeadaesn 181 Table 4 21 Retransmission Percentage Equivalence rwrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnen 184 Table 4 22 Examples of Retransmissions on Different Modulation Levels rrrnxrrnnnrnnnnrnnnvennn 185 Table 4 23 MIR Ranges and Defaults asanannnannannnananennnnnvnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnnnenannnennnnavenannavenener 191 Table 4 24 CIR Ranges and Defaulks uuammurseu summen eervkjnsisjem viv jenten 191 Table 4 25 Used Uplink MIR for Various PIF Values Configured Uplink MIR 54 Mbps
90. 4 2 6 2 19 New feature SW Version 5 2 May 2008 Appendix E Parameters Summary Updated to reflect all SW version 5 2 changes SW Version 5 2 May 2008 AU ODU types Table 1 2 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 New table reflecting the new 0 9 MHz AU ODU SW Version 5 2 June 2008 SU ODU types Table 1 4 Table 2 1 Updated more details SW Version 5 2 June 2008 AU E ODU mechanical specifications Table 1 19 Table 1 23 Updated to reflect new 0 9 GHz ODU SW Version 5 2 June 2008 Packing Lists Sections 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 4 Updated to reflect new 0 9 GHz AU ODU SW Version 5 2 June 2008 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued ODU Installation Section 2 3 Updated to reflect new 0 9 GHz AU ODU SW Version 5 2 June 2008 Maximum Output Power Table 1 8 Updated 27 dBm for 0 9 GHz units SW Version 5 2 June 2008 RESET Button Functionality Section 2 4 1 Updated SW Version 5 2 June 2008 Association Database in AU 6 2 12 Sections 4 2 2 1 4 2 5 4 1 4 2 Updated Association SNAP from another AU is not used for removal of SU from the database SW Version 5 2 June 2008 SU Unit Status Section 4 2 2 1 Updated added AUTHENTICATING status SW Version 5 2 June 2008 MAC Address List Section 4 2 6 4 7 Corrected supplier s OUI is 00 10 E7 SW Version 5
91. 5 Default Multicast Key AU only The Multicast Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting multicasts and broadcasts when Data Encryption is enabled Available values range from 1 to 4 The default is KEY 1 4 2 6 7 6 Key 1 to Key 4 The Key options enables defining the encryption key to be used for initializing the pseudo random number generator that forms part of the encryption decryption process The Keys must be set before the Shared Key authentication algorithm or Data Encryption can be used To support proper operation both the Key and the content must be identical at both sides of a wireless link Each Key is a string of 32 hexadecimal numbers For security reasons it is a write only parameter displayed as a string of asterisks The default for all 4 Keys is 000 0 a string of 32 zeros which means no key 4 2 6 7 7 Promiscuous Authentication AU only The Promiscuous Authentication mode enables new SUs to join an active cell where Shared Key operation and or Data Encryption are used even if this SU does not have the correct security parameters In promiscuous mode all downlink transmissions from AU to SUs are not encrypted allowing remote configuration of security parameters regardless of the current settings in the SUs of the parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O 205 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters related to data encryption After a new SU joins the ce
92. 6 1 9 Specifications aavavv4vv4vr4vvvmemrvrsvvsrr een 18 L9 IN REE NE EE tacts 18 1 9 2 DER COrNTG HON siriani Eaa E a eR 20 1 9 3 Configuration and Management sannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 20 1 9 4 Standards Compliance General rrnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnernnnnnnnnnennnernnnnnnnnennnne 21 1 9 5 Physical and Electrical aniier bekke 22 196 Environmental scosi aaa a A 28 BreezeACCESS System Manual e Contents Chapter 2 Installation sissioni EEEE 29 2 1 Installation Requirements aassavvsssssgnosr dnesbpnes nere 30 2 1 1 Packing ASU sg aise ads tected etc ctec a a Y 30 2 1 2 Indoor to Outdoor Cables vend adaconssscatnesadansaeanaieetacaiauanniannnauensnanenseaneseeeanamadanenee 33 2 2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines a arnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnun 34 2 3 Installing the Outdoor UN users en 35 2 3 1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit rrrnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 35 2 3 2 Pole Mounting the New ODU Lugssuenkeartd kkbemmumv hva 37 2 3 3 Protecting ODU Connecti NS sireni a Ea 40 2 3 4 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 41 2 3 5 Connecting the Indoor to Outdoor Cable rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 43 2 4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnen 46 2 4 1 RESE
93. 7 28 9 30 1 Aggregate 4 8 7 9 3 13 1 16 9 22 8 29 4 32 Bi directional The throughput results are for net TCP traffic excluding protocols overheads Table F 2 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level SNR Maximum Modulation Level SNR gt 23 dB 8 21 dB lt SNR lt 23 dB 7 16 dB lt SNR lt 21dB 6 13 dB lt SNR lt 16 dB 5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O 235 Appendix F Troubleshooting Low Throughput Problems Table F 2 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level Continued SNR Maximum Modulation Level 10 dB lt SNR lt 13 dB 4 8dB lt SNR lt 10dB 3 7 dB lt SNR lt 8 dB 2 6 dB lt SNR lt 7 dB 1 The maximum supported value depends on the unit s HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level according to the Sub Band BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D
94. AU SU 10 10000 30 No Test Up Rate Packet No On Upper AU SU 1 3 3 No Rate Retries on Lower AU SU Disable Enable No Modulations M Enable RTS Duration Mode AU SU Short RTS Duration Short RTS Duration No E Long RTS Duration Concatenation Option AU SU W Disable Enable No E Enable BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Maximum AU SU 256 to 2200 bytes for M 2200 for units Yes Concatenated Frame units with HW revision A with rev A or B Size ont MI 4032 for units M 256 to 4032 bytes for with rev C or units with HW revision C higher or higher Applicable only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub Band E 1 7 Service Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time User Filtering Option SU E Disable Disable Yes Mi iP Protocol Only M User Defined Addresses Only HM PPPoE Protocol Only Set Change Filter IP SU lt start address gt to lt end address gt 0 0 0 0 TO No Address Ranges or 0 0 0 0 lt base address gt mask lt mask gt all 8 entries DHCP Unicast Override SU E Disable DHCP Unicast Disable DHCP Yes Filter M Enable DHCP Unicast Unicast MIR Downlink SU SU 1 128 1024 Kbps SU 1 1024 Yes SU 3 128 3072 Kbps SU 3 3072 SU 6 128 6016 Kbps SU 6 6016 SU 8 128 13440 Kbps SU 8 13440 SU 54 128 53888 Kbps SU 54 53888 SU I 128 6016 Kbps
95. AU these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List Table 4 12 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 12 VLAN Data Port Functionality Trunk Link Action Data Port AU and SU Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list Accept from Wireless Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list Tag Insert No Tag Remove No 4 2 6 4 1 3 3 Hybrid Link Hybrid Link transfers both tagged and untagged frames as the devices connected to the unit can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware This is equivalent to defining no VLAN support as the unit is transparent to VLAN Table 4 13 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Hybrid link Table 4 13 VLAN Data Port Functionality Hybrid Link Action Data Port AU and SU Accept from Ethernet All Accept from Wireless All Tag Insert No Tag Remove No 4 2 6 4 1 3 4 Service Provider Link A Service Provider Link transfers both single tagged frames Service Provider tag and double tagged frames Service Provider tag Customer tag The Service Provider tag includes the Service Provider VLAN ID and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype
96. Beyond this point the simple brute force algorithm is used The Graceful Degradation Limit should be raised in proportion to the demand in the cell The higher the expected demand in a cell the higher the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit Higher demand can be expected in cases of significant over subscription and or in deployments where a high number of subscribers are in locations without proper communication with the AU at the highest data rate The available values range from 0 to 70 The default value is 70 MIR Only Option AU only When the MIR Only Option is enabled it forces the MIR CIR algorithm to use MIR values only The MIR CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate for each of the supported SUs under changing conditions of demand based on the configured CIR and MIR values When the MIR Only Option is enabled the MIR CIR algorithm is overridden and forced to operate with MIR values only For example the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit receive information at the specified MIR value When enabled the graceful degradation algorithm which is a part of the CIR MIR algorithm is also disabled The default is Enable MIR Threshold Percent AU only Sets the threshold of wireless link utilization above which the MIR CIR algorithm is activated The range is from 0 to 100 The default is 50 Show MIR CIR Parameters Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters BreezeACCESS VL
97. BreezeACCESSVL access units AU BS AUS BS AU SA and AUS SA along with SU L subscriber units some limitations apply To fully understand how SU L units behave please read the BreezeACCESSSU L Product Manual INFORMATION When deploying SU L subscriber units keep in mind the following Promiscuous Authentication is not currently supported by SU L units Operator ESSID is not currently supported by SU L units Hidden ESSID can not be employed when SU L units are present in the cell Per SU Distance Learning is not currently supported by SU L units SU L units support AES OCB encryption only starting with firmware version 3 1 30 patch The VLAN QinQ protocol is not currently supported by SU L units As a consequence SU L units are not compatible with Service Provider VLAN link types BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O es Chapter 1 System Description BreezeACCESSVL B amp B 4 9 GHz only 1 6 BreezeACCESSVL B amp B 4 9 GHz only BreezeACCESSVL B amp B is available in the 4 9 GHz band to support point to point applications A B amp B point to point link includes M AU D SA 4 9 6 VL A standalone AU with a 25 dBi 6 high gain directional antenna E SU D 4 9 54 BD VL SU 54 BD with a 25 dBi 6 high gain directional antenna BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 2 ee Q Chapter 1 System Description Networking Equipment 1 7 Networking Equipment The Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard da
98. BreezeACCESSVL and BreezeNET B products The Configuration File includes also parameters that are applicable only to BreezeNET B products Do not attempt to change the default values of these parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee D Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this appendix does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual The Set Factory Defaults utility is intended to enable management access to a unit in cases where such access is not possible due to wrong or unknown configuration of certain parameters This includes cases such as unknown Management VLAN ID and wrong management access filtering The utility accesses the unit by sending a special packet Access to the unit is based on its MAC address which must be entered in the Unit MAC address field The set unit defaults feature is only available via the Ethernet port _ To set factory defaults I Connec
99. CT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS Electronic Emi
100. Code Learning by SU is enabled the SU will use the AU s country code the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following parameters will be set according to new country definitions HM Maximum TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code M TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code M The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by the country code E The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level defined by the country code M The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode and the burst duration will be set to default The SU will learn a new Country Code only if it is running from the Main version After country code learning adaptation the unit is automatically reset The default is Disable INFORMATION The Country Code Learning by SU feature does not function with the default ESSID ESSID1 4 2 6 2 4 5 4 2 6 2 5 4 2 6 2 5 1 4 2 6 2 5 2 Show Frequency Definitions Upon selecting Show Frequency Definitions the selected Sub Band and Frequency are displayed In addition all the parameters displayed upon selecting Show DFS Settings and Data are also displayed Frequency Definition Submenu in SU Sub Band Select This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more Sub Bands The Sub Band Select option in the SU enables defining the sub band to
101. E 20 Configuration and Management L ueangesmessmeamekkmesgnisemvu hen 20 Standards Compliance General rrrnnnnrnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnuennnee 21 Mechanical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit urvvvrvnnnnnnnvvvvnvnnnnnnnvennnvnnnnnrerennnnn 22 Connectors SU A E Subscriber Unit rvvrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennennennnnenn 22 Ethernet Pin Out Assignments Lu sssees esesdemeemmukegevdmemnnn 23 Electrical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnvnnnnnrnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnn 23 Mechanical and Electrical Specifications SU I Subscriber Unit rrnnnrrnnnvnnnnrvnvrvrnnernn 23 Connectors SU I Subscriber Unit arunnnunnnnvnnnnnenennnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnuennnnnnnnnenennnnnnnenenunnene 24 Ethernet PIN OUT Assignments L uumemmnsgsniikdeieleemimepeueeudaiekjiaajni 24 Mechanical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment rnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn 24 Connectors Modular Base Station Equipment rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnn 25 Ethernet Pin Out Assignments Luuuaimnisikneumnemvuj heve bnokindde 25 Electrical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 25 Mechanical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit nrrnnnvnnnnnnnnvernnvrnnnnrnnnrrnnnernnneer 26 Connectors Stand Alone Access Unit uuumnrsudvnensmnesermeket ndnieee 27 Tables Table 1 25 Ethernet Pin Out Assignmen
102. Hidden ESSID Timeout parameter defines the time that SU will not try again to associate with an AU that is working with Hidden ESSID if the AU rejected Association Request sent by the SU because of wrong ESSID The range is from 1 to 60 minutes The default is 10 minutes 4 2 6 2 2 4 3 Show Hidden ESSID Parameters Select this option to view the current values of Hidden ESSID Support and Hidden ESSID Timeout 4 2 6 2 3 Frequency Definition Parameters Applicable also for SU L units 4 2 6 2 3 1 Sub Bands and Frequency Selection Each unit is delivered with one or more pre configured Sub Bands according to the country code These sets of parameters include also the frequencies that can be used and the bandwidth The parameters that determine the frequency to be used are set in the AU If more than one Sub Band is available the sub band to be used can be selected If only one Sub Band is supported then the sub band selection option is not available The SU should be configured with a minimal set of parameters to ensure that it will be able to automatically detect and use the frequency bandwidth used by the AU including possible changes in this frequency Automatic Sub Band Select feature To simplify the installation process the SU scans a definable frequencies subset after power up The defined frequencies subsets may include frequencies from more than one Sub Band enabling automatic detection of both frequency and bandwidth If the Best AU feature
103. IF algorithm has in setting up the rates Valid values range from 0 to 100 The default value is 0 PIF is disabled HM Proportional IR Update Period Sets up the duration in minutes between the periodical computation of MIR CIR values used for uplink downlink Valid values range from 1 to 30 minutes The default value is 5 minutes BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 4 2 6 6 2 8 4 2 6 6 2 9 4 2 6 6 2 10 4 2 6 6 2 11 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters E Proportional IR Threshold Percentage The percentage of the average rate variation compared to the configured rate that when exceeded triggers along with the Proportional IR Threshold Rate the used rate adjustment Valid values range from 0 to 100 The default value is 20 M Proportional IR Threshold Rate If the transmission modulation falls below this level and the Proportional IR Threshold Percentage conditions are met see above the rate adjustment is triggered Valid values range from 1 to 8 modulation The default value is 5 HM Show Proportional IR Parameters Displays all PIF parameters Graceful Degradation Limit AU only Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm In cases of over demand the performance of all SUs is degraded proportionally to their CIR IR 100 k x CIR The graceful degradation algorithm is used as long as k K where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit
104. M FTP Password The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D Q Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default is vx E Show FTP Event Log File Upload Parameters Displays the current values of the Event Log Upload parameters INFORMATION There is one set of general FTP parameters FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name and FTP Password This set or relevant parts of the set serves the SW Download procedure the lp Configuration File Upload Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures 4 2 3 10 Feature Upgrade The Feature Upgrade option enables to enter a license string for upgrading the unit to support new features and or options Upon selecting the Manual Feature Upgrade option the user will be requested to enter the license string Each license string is associated with a unique MAC Address and one feature option If the encrypted MAC Address in the license string does not match the unit s MAC Address the string will be rejected If there is a match a message notifying of the new feature option will be displayed The unit must be reset for the
105. N ID tags with matching VLAN ID are forwarded to the Ethernet Port provided the Ethertype of the tag matches the configured VLAN QinQ Ethertype M Before transmitting the frames to the Ethernet port the Service Provider VLAN ID tag is removed The Service Provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the Ethernet link port as follows A Service Provider tag that includes the configured Service Provider VLAN ID and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype is inserted in all frames both tagged and untagged before transmission to the wireless link VLAN Traffic Priority The VLAN Traffic Priority menu enables configuring the VLAN Priority field in applicable frames These parameters only impact the way in which other VLAN aware devices in the network will handle the packet All parameters that affect prioritization within the BreezeACCESSVL system including VLAN based prioritization are located in the Traffic Prioritization menu see Section 4 2 6 6 3 The VLAN Traffic Priority menu includes the following parameters M VLAN Priority Data SU only M VLAN Priority Management VLAN Priority Data SU only The VLAN Priority Data is applicable for Access Links only It enables configuring the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames transmitted to the wireless link All data frames are routed to the Low queue This parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is
106. Priority Traffic The Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic defines the maximum number of times that an unacknowledged high priority unicast packet can be retransmitted This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs served with it The range is from 1 to 14 times The default is 10 times Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic The Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic defines the maximum number of times that an unacknowledged low priority unicast packet can be retransmitted This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs served with it The range is from 1 to 14 times The default is 10 times AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic The AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for high priority packets The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or 0 to disable bursts for high priority packets The default is 16 4 milliseconds AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic The AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for low priority packets The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or 0 to disable bursts for low priority packets The default is 20 5 milliseconds SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic Th
107. RTS Threshold Section 4 2 6 5 1 For HW Rev C and higher the maximum is 4092 bytes This is also the default for RTS Threshold in AU SW Version 5 0 November 2007 MAC Address Database in AU Section 4 2 5 4 1 Updated the information displayed in the various options SW Version 5 0 November 2007 MAC Address Database in SU Section 4 2 5 4 2 Updated the displayed information SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Menu header Section 4 1 1 Updated details of Menu header SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Country Code Learning by SU Section 4 2 6 2 4 4 The SU will learn a new Country Code only if it is running from the Main version The default has been changed to Disable SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Show Unit Status Section 4 2 2 1 New read only indications E SU 54 Support AUS E Wireless Link Prioritization Support AU SW Version 5 0 November 2007 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Management Solutions Section 1 8 1 BreezeCONFIG has been replaced by AlvariCRAFT SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Set Complete Partial Defaults Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Selected Country Code does not change after Set Complete Partial Defaults SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Feature License Section 4 2 3 10 Added note on potential copy paste problems SW Version 5 0 November 2007 AIFS
108. S SH 19 rack 3U or desktop 13 x 48 2 x 25 6 4 76 BS PS DC DC power supply module 12 9 x 7 0 x 25 3 1 2 BS PS AC AC power supply module 12 9x 7 0 x 25 3 1 2 BS AU Indoor module of the 12 9x3 5x25 5 0 15 AU BS access unit AU E ODU pole or wall mountable 30 5x11 7x5 7 1 8 AU Ant 5G 16 60 2 3 5 pole mountable 43 6 x25 x 1 0 2 2 AU Ant 5G 17 90 2 3 5 pole mountable 55x25x 1 1 1 5 AU Ant 5G 15 120 2 3 5 pole mountable 53x 26x 1 1 2 5 AU Ant 5 4G 8 Omni 2 5 4 5 pole mountable 70cm high 6cm base 1 5 diameter AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni Surface or pole mountable 40cm high 3 2cm base 0 23 diameter AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 2 4 pole mountable 55x25x 1 7 1 5 AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 U 1 4 pole mountable 55x7 5x5 1 K BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Table 1 19 Mechanical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment Continued Unit Structure Dimensions cm Weight kg AU Ant 0 9G V H 10 90 1 75 4 pole mountable 122 x 34 3 x 20 3 15 4 up to 15 0 mechanical tilt AU Ant 0 9G 7 Omni Pole mountable 244 cm high 3 3 cm base 1 8 diameter 1 9 5 3 2 Connectors Table 1 20 Connectors Modular Base Station Equipment Unit Connector Description BS AU 10 100 BaseT 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC crossed Cable connection to a hub straig
109. SPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp i Legal Rights OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FA
110. SU I 6016 SU V 128 12032 Kbps SU V 12032 MIR Uplink SU SU 1 128 896 Kbps SU 1 896 Yes SU 3 128 2048 Kbps SU 3 2048 SU 6 128 4096 Kbps SU 6 4096 SU 8 128 13440 Kbps SU 8 13440 SU 54 128 53888 Kbps SU 54 53888 SU I 128 4096 Kbps SU I 4096 SU V 128 8064 Kbps SU V 8064 BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time CIR Downlink SU SU 1 0 1024 Kbps 0 Kbps Yes SU 3 0 2048 Kbps SU 6 0 4096 Kbps SU 8 0 11264 Kbps SU 54 0 45056 Kbps SU I 0 6016 Kbps SU V 0 12032 Kbps CIR Uplink SU SU 1 0 896 Kbps O Kbps Yes SU 3 0 2048 Kbps SU 6 0 4096 Kbps SU 8 0 11264 Kbps SU 54 0 45056 Kbps SU I 0 4096 Kbps SU V 0 8064 Kbps Maximum Delay SU 300 10 000 ms 5 000 ms Yes Maximum Burst AU SU 0 2 000 ms 5 ms No Duration Graceful Degradation AU 0 70 70 No Limit MIR Only Option AU E Disable Enable No E Enable MIR Threshold Percent AU 0 100 50 Yes VLAN Priority Threshold AU SU 0 7 7 No ToS Prioritization AU SU Mf Disable Disable No Option M Enable IP Precedence RFC791 Prioritization E Enable DSCP RFC2474 Prioritization IP Precedence AU SU 0 7 4 No Threshold DSCP Threshold AU SU 0 63 32 No UDP TCP Port Ranges AU SU Disable Disable No Prioritization Option E Enable Only for UDP M Ena
111. SU uses instead its actual distance from the AU The options are Disable or Enable The default is Disable Show Cell Distance Parameters Select Show Cell Distance Parameters to view the Cell Distance parameters In addition the Measured Maximum Cell Distance and the MAC address of the unit that the mechanism found to be the farthest from the AU are displayed Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called Inter Frame Spacing IFS This is the time during which the unit determines whether the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism The IFS depends on the type of the next frame to be transmitted as follows MI SIFS Short Inter Frame Spacing is used for certain frames that should be transmitted immediately such as ACK and CTS frames The value of SIFS is 16 microseconds E DIFS Distributed coordination function Inter Frame Spacing is typically used for other frame types when the medium is free If the unit decides that the medium is not free it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time slots as determined by the Contention Window back off algorithm see section Minimum Contention Window on page 178 after reaching a decision that the medium has become free DIFS equals SIFS plus AIFS where AIFS can be configured to a value from 1 to 50 time slots A unit with a lower AIFS has an advantage over units with a higher AIFS since it has a bette
112. SW files is in the structure UX_Y_Z bz where u is the unit type a for AU s for SU and X Y Z is the version number 8 destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded Use the SNMP write community lt SnmpWriteCommunity gt bz to define the destination filename The default SNMP write community is private For example to load the upgrade file a5 0 13 bz to an AU whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 tftp i 206 25 63 65 put a5 0 13 bz private bz 9 When the loading is complete the following message is displayed indicating completion of the TFTP process Download operation has been completed successfully 10 The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new version The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after verification If verification tests fail the loaded version will be rejected Among other things that are tested the unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the current Main versions The unit will also reject a file designated for a different unit type e g an AU upgrade file with the prefix a in the original file name will not be accepted by SUs 11 The FLASH memory can store two software versions One version is called Main and the second version is called Shadow The new version is loaded into the Shadow backup FLASH memory To check that the new firmware was properly downloaded and verified view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH as follows
113. Section 4 2 5 8 2 4 2 6 2 10 New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level Section 4 2 6 2 8 3 4 Default values updated SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Tx Control Section 4 2 6 2 8 5 Added option Ethernet Status Control SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold Section 4 2 6 2 15 New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Service Provider Link AN QinQ Section 4 2 6 4 1 New feature Service Provider Link option added to VLAN Link Type New parameters Service Provider VLAN ID VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype SW Version 4 0 July 2006 MAC Address List Section 4 2 6 4 7 Improved functionality New parameter MAC Address List Action SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Concatenation Section 4 2 6 5 11 Improved mechanism New parameter Maximum Concatenated Frame Size Removed Maximum Number of Frames SW Version 4 0 July 2006 MIR Table 4 23 Changes in values of Downlink MIR for SU 3 SU 6 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 IP Precedence Threshold Section 4 2 6 6 3 2 2 Default value updated SW Version 4 0 July 2006 DSCP Threshold Section 4 2 6 6 3 2 3 Default value updated SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent Section 4 2 6 6 3 5 New feature SW Versi
114. Section 4 2 6 2 11 Range has been increased from 1 2 to 1 50 time slots SW Version 5 0 November 2007 Data Encryption Option Section 4 2 6 7 2 AU with Data Encryption Option enabled can accept non encrypted data frames previously it was stated that this is applicable only for SU SW Version 5 0 December 2007 Section 4 2 6 6 3 6 2 The range has been changed from 3 254 to 3 50 SW Version 5 0 December 2007 MIR Defaults Table 4 23 Default value for SU 54 have been updated 53 888 SW Version 5 0 December 2007 Regulation Max EIRP Table 3 2 Updated New Country Codes updated values for UK 5 8 GHz SW Version 5 0 December 2007 Scanning Mode Section 4 2 6 2 7 Updated description set to passive if DFS supported by Country Code SW Version 5 0 December 2007 Pulse Detection Sensitivity Section 4 2 6 2 17 5 Updated description SW Version 5 0 December 2007 Noise Immunity Control Section 4 2 6 2 17 Updated Available only in units with HW Revision C and higher except to Pulse Detection Sensitivity that is available also in units with HW Revision B SW Version 5 0 December 2007 Antenna Gain Section 4 2 6 2 9 Range updated SW Version 5 0 December 2007 900 MHz Band Sections 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 2 1 AA 211A 23 2 2553 32 Table 1 1 Table 1 8 Table 1 12 Table 1 13 Table 1 19 Table 1 23 Table 3 2 New Radio Band a
115. T Button Functionality Luuamnesnmmmanugkenennkkeeni vkonksnmijnede 47 2 5 Installing the SUM iscsi eerste eens eee eee eee eder 48 2 5 1 Installation Requirements stinnde sixth cndincantedanadebenncanhavauslarale le dacenalanaheseaunmennencetbesans 48 2 5 2 SU CONMECTONS and LEDS Lava 49 255 feb GUIDE IMSS Lasse 50 252 Installing the SUl yiio ana a e a a a a aaas 51 2 5 5 Installing the Detached Antenna sssssssssssssrsnrsnnnnrrunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 51 2 6 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnenen 58 2 6 1 BS SH Slot Assignment ssssssssssssesunrrnennnnunnnerunnrnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnunnnennnnnee nn nnnn 58 2 6 2 BS PS AC Power Supply Module ss sssssssssssssssnrsnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 58 2 6 3 BS PS DC Power Supply Module sssssssssssssssssnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 59 2 6 4 BS AU Network Interface Module annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 60 2 6 5 Installing the BS SH Chassis and Modules rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 61 Chapter 3 lt COMMISSIONING sais cincdlsctaccceeestnrciersccaddcinivecerndcanteonacteceuctecesacweciocestocnies 64 3 1 Configuring Basic Parameters icccsc ieee cscecess Abe oced sd dese ce rceieeca ceneidaeseneeieesee Ss 65 31L Initial COMTI ANON ee 65 3 1 2 Country Code Selection Lae canes peanenuananeeetatenetuneadecancn
116. The Ports Control sub menu includes the Ethernet Port Control option BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 4 2 6 4 9 1 4 2 6 4 10 4 2 6 5 4 2 6 5 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Ethernet Port Control The Ethernet Port Control option allows enabling or disabling non management traffic to from the Ethernet port When changed to Disable all current data sessions will be terminated The unit is still manageable via the Ethernet port even if it is disabled for data traffic The default selection is Enable Show Bridge Parameters The Show Bridge Parameters option displays the current values of the Bridge parameters Performance Parameters The Performance Parameters menu enables defining a series of parameters that control the method by which traffic is transmitted through the wireless access network The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters RTS Threshold Minimum Contention Window Maximum Contention Window Multicast Modulation Level AU only Maximum Modulation Level Control Modulation Level Average SNR Memory Factor Number of HW Retries Burst Mode Adaptive Modulation Concatenation Parameters RTS Threshold The RTS Threshold parameter defines the minimum frame size that requires an RTS CTS Request To Send Clear To Send handshake Frames whose size is smaller than the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link without bei
117. The User Filtering Parameters menu provides the following options User Filtering Option The User Filtering Option disables or enables the User Filtering feature The following options are available M Disable no filtering M IP Protocol Only only IP Protocol packets pass M User Defined Addresses Only only IP frames from to IP addresses included in the User Filter Addresses list pass M PPPoE Protocol Only SU Only only PPPoE messages pass Ethernet type 0x8863 and 0x8864 The default selection is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual B B 4 2 6 6 1 2 4 2 6 6 1 3 4 2 6 6 1 4 4 2 6 6 1 5 4 2 6 6 1 6 4 2 6 6 1 7 4 2 6 6 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Set Change Filter IP Address Range The Set Change Filter IP Address Ranges option enables defining updating up to 8 IP address ranges to from which IP frames are to pass if the User Defined Addresses Only option is selected in the User Filtering Option parameter The default Filter IP Address Range is 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 0 all 8 ranges A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address in the format lt start address gt to lt end address gt example 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 255 or a base address and a mask in the format lt base address gt mask lt mask gt example 192 168 1 1 mask 255 255 255 0 Delete Filter IP Address Range The Delete Filter IP Address Range option enabl
118. U IP address 10 0 0 253 Yes FTP Gateway IP AU SU IP address 0 0 0 0 Yes Address FTP User Name AU SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters vx Yes FTP Password AU SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters vx Yes FTP Log File Name AU SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters logfile log Yes FTP Log File AU SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters None Yes Destination Directory Use to clear empty Event Log Policy AU SU i Message Warning Yes E Warning E Error E Fatal E Log None Log Out Timer AU SU 1 999 minutes 5 Yes BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Ethernet Port AU SU Mi Force 10 Mbps and Half Duplex Auto No Negotiation Mode E Force 10 Mbps and Full Duplex Negotiation M Force 100 Mbps and Half Duplex E Force 100 Mbps and Full Duplex E Auto Negotiation Change System AU SU Up to 34 printable ASCII characters None Yes Location Manual Feature AU SU License string 32 to 64 hexadecimal None No Upgrade digits Change Mode AU SU Normal Mode Normal Yes E Threshold Mode SU only Mode Threshold Type SU E Disabled Disabled Yes E RSSI E CRC E SNR E Average Modulation Threshold Mode SU E Equal or lower than Equal to Yes E Equal or higher than E Equal to E 1 2 IP Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time IP Address AU SU IP address 10 0 0 1 No
119. U LEDS rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnenerennnnnennnnnrnnnnnnnnnnn 77 LE 39 SUSILED RE EE EEE EEE 78 Table 3 10 SU I SNR Bar LED Functionality In Normal Mode rrrnrevnnnnnnnnrerennnnnnnnnnerennnnnnnnnrennnr 78 Table 4 1 Default PASO Babe dudekbuaknpeae 81 Table 4 2 Parameters not changed after Set Complete Factory Operator Defaults 90 Table 4 3 Parameters that are not changed after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults 91 Table 4 4 Threshold Target Value Ranges rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 101 Table 4 5 Authentication and Association Process rurrannennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnn 112 Table 4 6 DFS Behavior on SUs Using ETSI Based Country COdesS rrnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 123 BreezeACCESS System Manual e e e Tables Table 4 7 Comparison Between DFS Implementations for Various Country Codes on the SU 124 Table 4 8 Enhanced ETSI Radar Detection Behavior rrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnneennn 129 Table 4 9 Maximum TX Power for VL 900 UnitS arnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 137 Table 4 10 VLAN Management Port Functionality ernnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnn 161 Table 4 11 VLAN Data Port Functionality Access Link rrnnnvnnnvannnnnvnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnennnnnnr 162 Table
120. Up to two BS PS AC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station chassis The BS PS AC installation kit includes the following components M BS PS AC power supply module E Mains power cord BS PS DC Power Supply Up to two BS PS DC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station chassis The BS PS DC installation kit includes the following components M BS PS DC power supply module E DC power cable AU E SA Standalone Access Unit The AU E SA installation kit includes the following components BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D 2 1 1 4 2 1 1 5 Chapter 2 Installation Installation Requirements E IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit E Mains power cord HM AU ODU outdoor unit Table 2 3 Access Unit ODU Types AU ODU Type Description AU E ODU A rectangular enclosure 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 cm with a connection to an external antenna antenna and cable not included HW revision D or lower M Pole mounting kit for the AU ODU the kit for the new smaller size ODU is different from the kit for all other ODUs Optional Items Available from Alvarion M IDU to ODU Category 5 Ethernet cable kit with a shielded RJ 45 connector crimped on one end and two shielded RJ 45 connectors available in different lengths For more details refer to section Indoor to Outdoor Cables on page 33 Antenna for SU AU E ODUs and RF cable Tilt Pole Mounting kit for the new smaller size
121. VL System Manual ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 5 10 2 Adaptive Modulation Algorithm In Use This submenu allows users to choose between the basic Adaptive Modulation algorithm and the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm M Adaptive Modulation The decisions made by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm for the modulation level to be used are based on multiple parameters including information on received signal quality SNR that is received periodically from the destination unit the time that has passed since the last transmission to the relevant unit and the recent history of successful and unsuccessful transmissions retransmissions In the AU the decision algorithm is performed separately for each SU The transmission retransmission mechanism operates as follows I Each new frame first transmission attempt will be transmitted at a modulation level selected by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm 2 If the first transmission trial fails the frame will be retransmitted at the same modulation level up to the maximum number of retransmission attempts defined by the Number of HW Retries parameter E Statistics Based Rate Control The Statistics Based Rate Control decision algorithm uses statistical analysis of the successfully unsuccessfully sent packets to determine when lowering the modulation would increase the actual data rate If the connection is stable it will periodically check the uni
122. When the Per SU Distance Learning option is enabled the AU uses the re association message to send to each SU its estimated distance from the AU The per SU distance is used to calculate the ACK timeout to be used by the SU When the Per SU Distance Learning option is disabled or if it cannot be used because the SU uses a previous SW version that does not support this feature the SU will use the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout The AU always uses the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout It should be noted that if the size of the time slot used by all units is adapted to the distance of the farthest unit then no unit will have an advantage when competing for services However this reduces the overall achievable throughput of the cell In certain situations the operator may decide to improve the overall throughput by reducing the slot size below the value required for full fairness using the Fairness Factor parameter This means that when there is competition for bandwidth the back off algorithm will give an advantage to SUs that are located closer to the AU The Cell Distance Parameters menu includes the following parameters Cell Distance Mode The Cell Distance Mode option defines whether the maximum distance of the AU from any of the SUs it serves will be determined manually using the Maximum Cell Distance parameter or automatically In addition the Per SU Distance Learning feature is supported only when t
123. a from Minimum SNR Level SU Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages SU ATPC Power Level Step SU E Transmit Power E Maximum Tx Power SU M Tx Control AU HM Antenna Gain Refer to section Air Interface Parameters on page 118 for a description of these parameters 4 2 4 5 Country Code Parameters M Country Code Select M Re apply Country Code Values Refer to section Country Code Parameters on page 206 for a description of these parameters 4 2 4 6 Bridge Parameters HM VLAN Support VLAN ID Management Refer to section Bridge Parameters on page 158 for a description of these parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O 4 2 4 7 4 2 5 4 2 5 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Security Parameters Authentication Algorithm Data Encryption Option Security Mode E E E M Default Multicast Key AU M Default Key SU E Key1toKey4 M Promiscuous Authentication AU Some or all of the security parameters may not be available in units that do not support the applicable features Refer to section Security Parameters on page 203 for a description of these parameters Site Survey Menu The Site Survey menu displays the results of various tests and counters for verifying the quality of the wireless link These tests can be used to help determine where to position the units for optimal coverage antenna alignment and troubleshooting The counters can serve for
124. able or Disable E Burst Mode Option Enable or Disable a DFS Option Enable or Disable On SUs this parameter displays the current option in the relevant AU On AUs it displays the DFS values configured in each SU Concatenation Option Enable or Disable E Country Code Learning by SU Enable or Disable This parameter is available only in SUs displaying the current option in the relevant AU M Per SU Distance Learning Enable or Disable This parameter is available only in SUs displaying the current option in the relevant AU Show Link Capability Security Configuration Select this option to view information on current security related parameters of relevant units For each relevant unit identified by its MAC address the following details are displayed E Security Mode WEP AES OCB or FIPS 197 M Authentication Algorithm Shared Key or Open System E Data Encryption Option Enable or Disable Show Link Capability by AU SU only Select this option to view all capabilities information General wireless Link Configuration Security Configuration of a selected AU by its MAC address Show Link Capability by SU AU only Select this option to view all capabilities information General Wireless Link Configuration Security Configuration of a selected SU by its MAC address Advanced Configuration Menu The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all parameters including the parameters available through the Basic C
125. ace between 6 to 16 minutes from the time the SU ceased sending data or responding to these keep alive frames for AUS the sampling interval is 1 minute meaning decision time of 6 to 7 minutes The aging time specified for entries in these table There is no aging time for Association Info entries The maximum number of entries permitted for this table which is specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter The default value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512 M Show MIR CIR Database Displays information on the MIR CIR support for associated Subscriber Units Each entry includes the following information The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit The values of the MIR and CIR parameters configured in the applicable SU for the downlink AU to SU and for the uplink SU to AU The value configured in the applicable SU for the Maximum Delay parameter The Unit Name of the SU The SW version of the SU The Unit Type of the SU IP Address E Display MAC Pinpoint Table The MAC Pinpoint table provides for each of the Ethernet stations identified by the MAC Address connected to either the AU or to any of the SUs served by it the identity MAC Address of the wireless device to which they are connected HM Gateways Table When the DRAP option is supported the Gateways Table provides details on the active Gateways connected to any of the SUs served by the AU For eac
126. adar Event Reports defines this minimum number of radar reports required for the AU to initiate the DFS The range is 0 to 512 radar detections When set to 0 the mechanism is disabled BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 128 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default is 0 4 2 6 2 4 3 10Remote Radar Events Monitoring Period ETSI Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands The Remote Radar Events Monitoring Period defines the maximal time interval in which the Remote Radar Event Reports must be collected for the AU to initiate the DFS The range is 1 to 30 minutes The default is 30 4 2 6 2 4 3 11Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset When the Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset is enabled after the next reset all viable frequencies will be marked in the database as Radar Free including frequencies previously marked as either Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar In addition the unit will start operation using its default frequency The default is Disable 4 2 6 2 4 3 12Enhanced ETSI Radar Detection Only for ETSI Based Country Codes This mechanism is designed to offer the ability to switch between the old and new ETSI DFS Radar detection mechanisms Its functionality is the following M On The Radar detection mechanism supports Staggered PRF detection in the entire 5 4GHz band and increases detection sensitivity see Table 4 8 for complete list of changes M Off The Rada
127. ameter the unit retransmits the frame until an ACK is received If an ACK is not received before the number of retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number which is determined by the Number of HW Retries parameter the frame is dropped Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three queues Low Medium and High Packets in the High queue have the highest priority for transmission and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority The packets in the High queue will be transmitted first When this queue is emptied the packets in the Medium queue will be sent Finally when both the High and Medium queues are empty the packets in the Low queue will be sent Data packets are routed to either the High or Low queue according to the queue selected for them before the MIR CIR mechanism for more information see section Traffic Prioritization on page 195 Broadcasts multicasts are routed to the Medium queue applicable only for AU Control and wireless management frames generated in the unit are routed to the High queue Any frame coming from the Ethernet port which is meant to reach another BreezeACCESSVL unit whose MAC address is present in the Association database via the wireless port as opposed to BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 2 O Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters messages intended for stations behind other BreezeACCESSVL units is sent to the High
128. an communicate The Link Capability feature enables to adapt the configuration of the unit according to the capabilities of other relevant unit s to ensure optimal operation The Link Capability submenu includes the following options Show Link Capability General Select this option to view information on general parameters of relevant units For each relevant unit identified by its MAC address the following details are displayed M Hwver the hardware version of the unit M CpldVer The version of the Complex Programmable Logic Device CPLD used in the unit This parameter is available only in AUs displaying the CPLD version in the relevant SU M Country The 3 or 4 digits country code supported by the unit E Swver The SW version used by the unit This parameter is available only in SUs displaying the SW version in the relevant AU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ao 4 2 5 8 2 4 2 5 8 3 4 2 5 8 4 4 2 5 8 5 4 2 6 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M BootVer The Boot Version of the unit This parameter is available only in AUs displaying the Boot version in the relevant SU Show Link Capability Wireless Link Configuration Select this option to view information on current wireless link parameters of relevant units For each relevant unit identified by its MAC address the following details are displayed M ATPC Option Enable or Disable E Adaptive Modulation Option En
129. an external antenna not included Not available in the 0 9 GHz band HW revision D or lower New AU E ODU A diamond shaped enclosure 22 x 22 x 7 cm with a connection to an external antenna not included E model units are supplied without an antenna The available antennas are listed in Table 1 3 Table 1 3 AU Antennas Antenna Band MHz Horizontal Gain dBi Beam Width AU Ant 5G 16 60 5150 5875 60 16 AU Ant 5G 17 90 5150 5875 90 17 AU Ant 5G 15 120 5150 5875 120 15 AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 4900 5100 120 15 AU Ant 4 9G 9 Omni 4900 5100 360 9 AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni 5725 5875 360 8 AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK The 5725 5850 120 14 antenna pattern complies with Ofcom s IR 2007 EIRP profiles AU Ant 0 9G V H 10 90 902 928 90 2x10 The BS AU indoor module connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10 100BaseT RJ 45 interface The indoor module is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O e Chapter 1 System Description Base Station Equipment Ethernet cable This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor module and the outdoor unit and also transfers power 54 VDC and control from the indoor module to the outdoor unit 1 2 2 Standalone Micro cell Access Unit The standalone AU E SA Access Unit is very similar to the AU E BS unit The difference is in the structure of the indoor part in the AU E SA Access Unit the indoor unit is a st
130. anagement Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Management and the VLAN Priority Management parameters If the VLAN ID Management is 65535 No VLAN E For Access Trunk and Hybrid links Only untagged management frames received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit M An AU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID Management 65535 cannot be managed from either the Ethernet or wireless ports BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D Q 4 2 6 4 1 3 4 2 6 4 1 3 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M An SU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID Management 65535 will accept untagged management frames from the Ethernet port From the wireless port it will accept only tagged frames with a VLAN ID tag that matches the defined Service Provider VLAN ID E Management frames generated by the unit are not tagged The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID Management parameter The table is valid for all link types Refer to the VLAN Link Type Access Link Trunk Link and Service Provider Link options for some restrictions when configuring this parameter Table 4 10 VLAN Management Port Functionality Action Manageme
131. and Modules This section describes how to install the power supply and Access Unit network interface modules in the Base Station chassis To install the BS SH chassis and modules BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment 1 Install the BS SH chassis in a 19 cabinet To prevent over heating leave a free space of at least 1U between the upper lower covers of the BS SH chassis and other units in the cabinet OR Place the BS SH chassis on an appropriate shelf or table When mounting the BS SH on a shelf or table attach the rubber legs supplied with the unit 2 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the rear panel of the BS SH chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw 3 Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to the cabinet if applicable 4 Carefully insert the BS PS power supply and the BS AU modules into the relevant slots and push firmly until they are securely locked Before insertion verify that the switches of all BS PS modules are in the OFF position Refer to section BS SH Slot Assignment on page 58 for a description of the slot assignment Close the captive screws attached to each module Place blank covers over all of the unused slots Connect the indoor to outdoor cable s to the RADIO connector s of the BS AU module s oOo N O U If a BS PS DC power supply is use
132. andalone desktop or wall mountable unit the same Universal IDU that is also used in the SU rather than a 19 module There are two types of Standalone Access Units differing in the maximum number of Subscriber Units that they can serve M The AU SA Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units 124 when Data Encryption is used M The AUS SA Access Unit can serve up to 25 SUs except SU 54 refer to section 1 3 for details on availability of SU types in different bands Optionally it may be licensed to support also SU 54 units in bands where SU 54 unit type is available INFORMATION For convenience all references to AU SA are applicable also for AUS SA unless explicitly stated otherwise The IDU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10 100BaseT RJ 45 interfaces and is powered from the 110 240 VAC mains The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units and also transfers power 54 VDC and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D e 1 3 Chapter 1 System Description Subscriber Unit Subscriber Unit The Subscriber Unit SU installed at the customer premises enables the customer data connection to the Access Unit The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient platform for high speed Internet and Intranet services The use of pack
133. anning for another AU after losing connectivity with the current AU only after 7 seconds during which no beacons were received from the current AU This will prevent scanning for another AU in cases where no beacons were received due to a short temporary problem When set to Enable the SU will wait for a duration equal to the Beacon Period multiplied by Max Beacons Lost parameters as they are set in the AU before it starts scanning for another AU In addition when the Roaming Option is enabled the SU will send Roaming SNAP messages upon associating with a new AU This enables fast distribution of the new location for all clients that are behind the SU In this case the SU will send multicast SNAP messages via the wireless link each time it associates with a new AU except for the first association after reset The SU will send one SNAP message for each client learned on its Ethernet port based on its bridging table In the SNAP message the clients MAC address is used as the source address The AU that receives this SNAP message learns from it the new location of the clients It forwards the SNAP to other AUs and Layer 2 networking equipment via its Ethernet port to facilitate uninterrupted connectivity and correct routing of transmissions to these clients The new AU as well as the previous AU with which the SU was associated will forward the SNAP messages to all other SUs associated with them The default is Disable Ports Control SU only
134. anning mode for a definite period during which information will be gathered The scanned channels will be all the frequencies included in the selected sub band Upon activating the spectrum analysis the unit will automatically reset During the information gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data It also will not be able to synchronize associate meaning that it cannot be managed via the wireless link During the spectrum analysis period the unit security mode is changed to promiscuous to enable gathering information regarding all legal frames received by the unit At the end of the period the unit will reset automatically regaining normal operability upon start up The Spectrum Analysis submenu includes the following options Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period The Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period is the period of staying on each channel during each cycle for information gathering when performing spectrum analysis Range 2 30 seconds Default value 5 seconds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ae 4 2 6 2 14 2 4 2 6 2 14 3 4 2 6 2 14 4 4 2 6 2 14 5 4 2 6 2 14 6 4 2 6 2 14 7 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles The Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycle is the number of scanning cycles when performing Spectrum Analysis Range 1 100 cycles Default value 2 cycles Automatic Channel Selection AU only The Automatic Channel selection
135. anufacturer Part Number Synergy Cables Ltd 612098 www synergy cables com HES Cabling Systems H5E 00481 www hescs com Teldor 8393204101 www teldor com Southbay Holdings Limited TSM2404A0D 11th Fl 15 Lane 347 Jong Jeng Rd Shin Juang City Taipei County Taiwan R O C Attn Eva Lin Tel 886 2 2832 3339 Fax 886 2 2206 0081 E mail eva south bay com tw INFORMATION _ oar In case of missing information product specifications ordering information etc regarding these j products on the manufacturer s web site it is highly recommended to contact the manufacturer s sales representative directly BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installation Requirements 2 2 Chapter 2 Installation Equipment Positioning Guidelines Equipment Positioning Guidelines This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations for the various BreezeACCESSVL system components CAUTION A ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should install outdoor units and antennas Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESSVL product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units
136. arameter in the AU should not be set to a value above 13 dBm The Maximum Transmit power of the SU should not be set to a value above 10 dBm This requirement although not indicated in the certification document is needed following the tests performed in the certification lab NOTE 2 FCC 5 3 GHZ 10 MHz Bandwidth For full compliance with FCC regulation of units with HW rev C using a 10 MHz bandwidth if you wish to include frequency channel 5265 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs should not be set to a value above 25 Antenna Gain If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters this frequency should not be used NOTE 3 FCC 5 3 GHZ 20 MHz Bandwidth For full compliance with FCC regulations the following requirements should be followed in units using a 20 MHz bandwidth I In units HW Revision B if you wish to include frequency channel 5270 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs should not be set to a value above 17 Antenna Gain If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters this frequency should not be used 2 In units with HW Revision C if you wish to include one or more of frequency channels 5270 5275 and 5330 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU and the Maxi
137. arization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing upward as in the figure above BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp oa Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit M For horizontal polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing sideward and the connectors facing downward 2 3 2 2 Pole Mounting the ODU Using the Clamp Figure 2 4 and Figure 2 5 illustrate how to mount an ODU on a pole using the clamp and threaded rods INFORMATION There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the grooves pointing outward and fasten them to the unit using a screwdriver Install the unit with the bottom panel which includes the connectors facing downward Figure 2 4 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Vertical Polarization BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit Figure 2 5 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Horizontal Polarization BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 39 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit 2 3 23 Pole Mounting the ODU with the Tilt Accessory Tilt Control Screw Figure 2 6 New ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory Vertical Polarization gt To mount the ODU on a pole using the Tilt accessory I Attach the Tilt accessory to the ODU using the two pairs of flat washers spring washer
138. associated E Blinking Red No SU is associated E Off Wireless link is disabled ODU CURRENT Current Consumption of E Red over current CONSUMPTION the Outdoor Unit E Blinking Red open circuit or below anticipated current consumption E Green within tolerance ODU STATUS Outdoor Unit Self test E Green Self test passed and ODU ready for operation E Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation E Red fatal failure IDU PWR Power indication for the E Green IDU power is OK Indoor Unit E Off no power is supplied to the IDU ALARM Indoor Unit Alarm E Red a fatal failure indication Indication E Off IDU is functioning properly Table 3 8 PS1073 SU IDU AU SA IDU LEDs Name Description Functionality POWER Power Indication E Green IDU power is OK E Off No power or power failure ETH Self test and E Off No Ethernet connectivity has been detected end to end Ethernet between the outdoor unit and the device connectivity connected to the indoor unit E Green Self test passed and Ethernet connection confirmed by the outdoor unit Ethernet integrity check passed 3 5 3 SU I Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the SU I unit examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the SU I unit The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D B Chapter 3 Commissioning Operation Verification
139. at the threshold is set for M Disabled There is no threshold defined for the LED The LED is always off unless all threshold conditions that were defined for the remaining LEDs are met RSSI Sets up a threshold for the Received Signal Strength Indication CRC Sets up a threshold for the Cyclical Redundancy Check percentage SNR Sets up a threshold for the Signal to Noise Ratio M Average Modulation Sets up a threshold for the average modulation 4 2 3 13 2 1 2 Threshold Mode This option defines how the threshold parameter see Threshold Type on page 100 relates to the threshold target value see Threshold Target on page 100 The available operators are E Equal or lower than The threshold parameter must be lower than or equal to the threshold target value for the LED to light up HM Equal or higher than The threshold parameter must be higher than or equal to the threshold target value for the LED to light up M Equal to The threshold parameter must be equal to the threshold target value for the LED to light up 4 2 3 13 2 1 3 Threshold Target This option defines the threshold target value Depending on the threshold type the following value ranges apply BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 4 Threshold Target Value Ranges Threshold Type Value Range RSSI 108 0 CRC 0 100 SNR 0 80 Average Mo
140. atee 67 BreezeACCESS System Manual e e Contents 3 1 3 Transmit Power Compliance With Regulations rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnennnnnnnnnnnn 67 3 2 Using the Optional Y cable New SU A E ODU arnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 70 3 3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna ararnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnenn 71 3 4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level rrarnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 73 3 5 Operation Verification icsacnccecieccennesacrenscencceacectetaemanechenccecesaceniesenteenceneeceeceeaceneneae 75 S52 OQu utd or Unit VETO riria TE 75 3 5 2 Indoor Unit Vernticatio Misskien a a ene 76 35 3 SUA UTE VENTE 77 3 5 4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection Modular Base station rrrnrvvnnnnnnnnvvvnnnn 79 3 5 5 Verifying the Indoor to Outdoor Connection Modular Base Station 79 3 5 6 Verifying Data Connectivity veccieiesantanceadsnantdineencnadctensaanandhnanecannnndslansnesdantwnnauanadec 79 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 80 4 1 Working with the Monitor Program a a nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 81 4 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet arrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn 81 412 Common PP AIMS ieii Aadne 82 4 2 Menus and Poranmetersuauafiserusrare ak 84 EEE EEE a an EE aaa aA ES A 84 42 2 Into Screens NE
141. ation Parameters submenu includes 4 2 6 5 11 1 Concatenation Option The Concatenation Option enables or disables the concatenation mechanism The default is Enable 4 2 6 5 11 2 Maximum Concatenated Frame Size The Maximum Concatenated Frame Size parameter defines the maximum size in bytes for a concatenated frame BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 187 4 2 6 6 4 2 6 6 1 4 2 6 6 1 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The range is M 256 to 2200 bytes for units with HW revision A or B M 256 to 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher The Default values are M 2200 for units with HW revision A or B M 4032 for units with HW revision C or higher Service Parameters The Service Parameters menu enables defining user filtering MIR CIR parameters traffic prioritization parameters and DRAP parameters The Service Parameters menu includes the following options User Filtering Parameters MIR and CIR Parameters Traffic Prioritization DRAP Parameters AU only Wireless Link Prioritization only AU User Filtering Parameters The User Filtering Parameters submenu enables defining the IP addresses of user devices authorized to access the wireless medium for security and or control purposes In addition it can be used to enable the transmission and reception of specific protocol frames These filtering options do not affect management frames sent to or generated by the unit
142. ault factory configuration of all parameters except to Passwords general FTP parameters and AU s Frequency The IP address of the unit after setting to factory defaults is 10 0 0 1 F 2 SU Association Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action SU does not associate with AU Wrong configuration Check proper configuration of basic parameters ESSID Sub band and frequencies subset Best AU parameters ATPC Option Transmit Power Maximum Transmit Power Antenna Gain Security parameters Authentication Algorithm and Default Key If necessary use Promiscuous Mode in AU Access is denied by AU Verify that the SU is not included in MAC Address Deny List of the AU Link quality is too low E Verify that unit is in coverage area of AU according to radio planning E Verify that antenna is directed toward the AU E Try to improve location height of antenna F 3 Low Throughput Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action Check the dominant Low throughput is suspected Modulation Level in Per rate Counters and see expected throughput in the Expected problems Ethernet link E Verify proper settings of Ethernet operation mode actual Ethernet speed of 100 Mbps M Check Ethernet counters Wrong configuration Verify that Maximum Modulation level is not level Throughput table below of Maximum set to a valu
143. ble PPPoE Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Disable ARP Broadcast Override Filter The ARP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of ARP messages Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter broadcast messages should be filtered ARP broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable Select from the following options M Disable ARP messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter M Enable ARP messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Enable Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter parameters available in both AU and SU enable to limit the number of broadcast and or multicast packets that can be transmitted per second in order to prevent the potential flooding of the wireless medium by certain ARP attacks In SUs the limiter is placed after the Ethernet Broadcast Filters For this reason the limiter will receive only the packets that pass through these filters If the Ethernet filters of the SU are disabled the limiter will be applied to all relevant packets received BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D 173 4 2 6 4 3 1 4 2 6 4 3 2 4 2 6 4 3 3 4 2 6 4 4 4 2 6 4 5 Chap
144. ble 4 24 SU 54 Support SU 8 Support Updated description of SU 54 SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Section 4 2 2 1 Support by AUS AUS can support also SU 8 new product RTS Threshold Default value for AU in the 900 SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Section 4 2 6 5 1 MHz band is 60 New SU A ODU Updated SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Figure 2 3 AU types AU D models supplied with a SW Version 5 1 April 2008 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Noise Floor Calculation Section 4 2 6 2 18 Table 4 3 New feature SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Appendix E Parameters Summary Updated to reflect all SW version 5 1 changes SW Version 5 1 April 2008 SU V New product SW Version 5 2 May 2008 Table 1 5 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Hidden ESSID New feature SW Version 5 2 May 2008 Sections 4 2 2 1 4 2 6 2 2 4 2 4 4 4 2 5 6 Table 1 10 Table 3 1 Table 4 3 DFS in Universal Country Codes in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz band Sections 4 2 6 2 4 3 4 2 6 2 4 3 8 4 2 2 4 Table 3 1 New feature SW Version 5 2 May 2008 DFS Required By Regulations Section 4 2 6 2 4 3 1 Updated default Yes for Country Codes where required by regulations No for Universal Country Codes in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz bands SW Version 5 2 May 2008 Protecting ODU Connections Section 2 3 3 New SW Version 5 2 May 2008 Calibration of Noise Floor Indication Section
145. ble Only for TCP M Enable for both UDP and TCP UDP RTP RTCP AU SU RTP amp RTCP RTP amp RTCP No Prioritization E RTP Only BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time TCP RTP RTCP AU SU RTP amp RTCP RTP amp RTCP No Prioritization E RTP Only IP Range Prioritization AU SU Disable Disable No Option E Source IP Prioritization M Destination IP Prioritization E Source or Destination IP Prioritization IP Range Address AU SU 4 groups of up to 3 digits 0 0 0 0 No separated by dots IP Range Mask AU SU 4 groups of up to 3 digits 255 0 0 0 No separated by dots Low Priority Traffic AU SU 0 100 0 Yes Minimum Percent Wireless Link AU E Disable Disable Yes Prioritization Option E Enable Low Priority AIFS AU 3 50 3 Yes Number of HW Retries AU 1 14 10 Yes for High Priority Traffic Number of HW Retries AU 1 14 10 Yes for Low Priority Traffic AU Burst Duration for AU 0 40 in 0 25 milliseconds units 16 4 Yes High Priority Traffic milliseconds AU Burst Duration for AU 0 40 in 0 25 milliseconds units 20 5 Yes Low Priority Traffic milliseconds SU Burst Duration for AU 0 40 in 0 25 milliseconds units 822 Yes High Priority Traffic milliseconds SU Burst Duration for AU 0 40 in 0 25 milliseconds units 20 5 Yes Low Priority Traffic millisec
146. canning when searching for an AU In passive scanning the SU listens to the wireless medium for approximately two seconds at each frequency searching for beacons The disassociation period which is the time from the moment the link was lost until the SU decides that it should start searching for another AU is approximately seven seconds when the roaming option is disabled In some situations when there is a high probability that SUs might need to roam among different AUs the use of active scanning enables to significantly reduce the link establishment time This is achieved by using shorter dwell periods transmitting a Probe Request at each frequency This reduces the time spent at each frequency as well as the disassociation period When DFS is enabled on the SU Scanning Mode is forced to Passive The default selection is Passive Power Control Parameters The Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm simplifies the installation process and ensures optimal performance while minimizing interference to other units This is achieved by automatically adjusting the power level transmitted by each SU according to the actual level at which it is received by the AU To support proper operation of the system with optimal performance and minimum interference between neighboring sectors the ATPC algorithm should be enabled in all units The algorithm is controlled by the AU that calculates for each received frame the average SNR at which
147. cast address FF FF FF FF FF FF In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info and the Associated Subscriber Unitsii Database Association Info Each database includes the following information The current number of entries For Bridging Info this includes the Et Ethernet and the Vp Virtual ports entries For Association Info this is the number of the currently associated SUs INFORMATION An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions M The SU failed to respond to 100 consecutive data frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out M During the last 6 minutes or more the SU did not transmit any data frame and failed to respond to certain frames that typically are transmitted by the AU every 10 seconds Since the sampling interval for this state is about 10 minutes it means that the decision to remove the SU from the Associations Database will take place between 6 to 16 minutes from the time the SU ceased sending data or responding to these keep alive frames for AUS the sampling interval is 1 minute meaning decision time of 6 to 7 minutes The aging time specified for entries in these tables The aging time for Bridging Info is as specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter The default is 300 seconds There is no aging time for Association Info entries The maximum number of entries permitted for the
148. cated at a distance of less than 300 meters from the Base Station it is recommended to up tilt the antenna by approximately 10 to 15 especially in line of sight conditions to avoid saturation of the receivers by too strong signals M The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location where the indoor to outdoor cable enters the building The location of the indoor equipment should take into account its connection to a power outlet and the customer s equipment BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O 34 2 3 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit Installing the Outdoor Unit The following sections describe how to install the outdoor units including pole mounting the ODU and connecting the indoor to outdoor grounding and RF cables INFORMATION Ensure that outdoor units antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna pole when using external antenna are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges In any ev
149. catenation Parameters on page 186 Bad fragments received The number of fragments received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors Duplicate frames discarded The number of data frames discarded because multiple copies were received If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be received more than once Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port Internally discarded MIR CIR The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum permitted information rate TX retransmission The percentage of frames that were not transmitted properly and had to be retransmitted TX CRC The percentage of Cyclic Redundancy Check errors that occurred over the air link 4 2 5 2 Ping Test The Ping Test submenu is used to control pinging from the unit and includes the following options Destination IP Address The destination IP address of the device being pinged The default IP address is 192 0 0 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp B Q 4 2 5 3 4 2 5 3 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Number of Pings to Send The number of ping attempts per session The available range is from 0 to 9999 The default value is 1 Select 0 for continuous pinging M Ping Frame Length The pin
150. ch frame between the MAC header and the data VLAN implementation in BreezeACCESSVL units supports frame routing by port information whereby each port is connected to only one VLAN The system also supports the 802 1 QinQ standard which defines the way to have 2 VLAN tags double tagged frames This procedure allows an additional VLAN tag called Service Provider VLAN tag to be inserted into an existing IEEE 802 1Q tagged Ethernet frame This is a solution to transport multiple customers VLANs across the service provider s network without interfering with each other The VLAN Support menu includes the following parameters VLAN Link Type VLAN ID Data SU only VLAN ID Management VLAN ID Service Provider SU only VLAN Forwarding VLAN Relaying AU only VLAN Traffic Priority VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype Hex VLAN Extended Access SU only VLAN ID Extended Trunk SU only 4 2 6 4 1 1 VLAN ID Data SU only The VLAN ID Data is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter is set to Access Link It enables defining the VLAN ID for data frames which identifies the VLAN to which the unit belongs BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ee 4 2 6 4 1 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Valid values range from 1 to 4094 Default value 1 The VLAN ID Data affects frames received from the wireless link port as follows M Only tagged frames with a VLAN ID VID equal to the VLAN ID Da
151. ch parameters do require that the unit be reset BreezeACCESS VL System Manual D 23 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 2 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Menus and Parameters The following sections describe the menus and parameters provided by the Monitor program Main Menu The Main Menu enables to access the following menus depending on your access level as described in section Working with the Monitor Program on page 81 M Info Screens Provides a read only display of current parameter values Available at all access levels M Unit Control Enables to access general operations such as resetting the unit reverting to factory default parameters changing passwords and switching between software versions Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels M Basic Configuration Enables to access the set of parameters that are configured during the installation process These parameters are also available in the Advanced Configuration menu Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels M Site Survey Enables to activate certain tests and view various system counters Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels M Advanced Configuration Enables to access all system parameters including the Basic Configuration parameters Available only at the Administrator access level Info Screens Menu The Info Screens menu enables you to view the current values
152. ches for and communicates with a DHCP server Select from the following options M From Wireless Link Only M From Ethernet Only M From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The default for Access Units is From Ethernet Only The default for Subscriber Units is From Wireless Link Only Show IP Parameters The Show IP Parameters option displays the current values of the IP parameters including the Run Time IP Address Run Time Subnet Mask and Run Time Default Gateway Address Air Interface Parameters The Air Interface Parameters menu enables viewing the current Air Interface parameters defined for the unit and configuring new values for each of the relevant parameters Country Code and Sub Bands Each country has its own regulations regarding operation modes and parameters such as allowable frequencies and bandwidth the need to employ an automatic mechanism for detection and avoidance of frequencies used by radar systems maximum transmit power at each of the supported modulation levels and the ability to use burst transmissions To efficiently manage these country dependent parameters each unit has a Country Code parameter and a set of accompanying parameters which depend on this country code Where more than one set of parameters can be used the available sets are defined as Sub Bands selectable through the Frequency configuration menu BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp E Q Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameter
153. codes are applied on operating channels overlapping partially or totally with A frequency range 5600 5650 MHz the Channel Check Time is forced to minimum 600 seconds 10 minutes 4 2 6 2 5 3 3 Channel Avoidance Period The Channel Avoidance Period defines the time that the frequency will remain marked in the database as Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar after detecting radar activity These frequencies will not be used when searching for a new frequency When this time has elapsed the unit frequency s marking will change to Radar Free The range is 1 to 60 minutes BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 131 4 2 6 2 5 3 4 4 2 6 2 5 3 5 4 2 6 2 5 3 6 4 2 6 2 5 3 7 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default is 30 minutes Minimum Pulses to Detect The Minimum Pulses to Detect parameter defines the minimum number of radar pulses that should be detected before reaching a decision that radar is active on the channel The range is from 1 to 100 pulses The default is 4 pulses Channel Reuse Parameters DFS The Channel Reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under certain conditions that indicate low radar activity on the original channel The conditions are that radar was detected in this channel not more than N times Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period during the last T hours Radar Activity Assessment Period When the Channel Reuse Option is enab
154. confirm the request The DRAP feature is applicable only for gateways that support DRAP The following is a description of DRAP related parameters DRAP Support The DRAP Support option enables or disables the DRAP feature that offers the possibility of identifying the connected Gateways and limiting the maximum number of voice calls made by Voice Gateways in a cell The default option is Enable UDP Port The UDP Port parameter defines the UDP port used by the DRAP protocol The range is from 8000 to 8200 The default value is 8171 Maximum Number of Voice Calls The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the maximum number of active calls in the cell The range is between 0 and 255 The default value is 40 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 202 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 6 4 4 DRAP TTL The DRAP TTL parameter sets the time between two consecutive Allocation Requests from the Gateways The Allocation requests are used to identify the existence of an active Gateway In Voice Gateways they also include information about the current number of voice calls and requests for new calls The range is between 1 and 255 seconds The default value is 10 seconds 4 2 6 6 4 5 Number of Active Voice Calls This option shows the current number of active voice calls in the cell 4 2 6 6 5 Show Service Parameters Displays the current values of the Service Parameters
155. ctivate IP filter on Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Ports Applicable to all options of the Access to Network Management parameter The unit can be managed from the port s defined by the BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ep 4 2 6 3 3 4 2 6 3 4 4 2 6 3 5 4 2 6 3 6 4 2 6 3 6 1 4 2 6 3 6 2 4 2 6 3 6 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Access to Network Management parameter only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter The default selection is Disable Set Network Management IP Address The Set Network Management IP Address option enables defining up to 10 IP addresses of devices that can manage the unit if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled The default Network Management IP Address is 0 0 0 0 all 10 addresses Delete a Network Management IP Address The Delete Network Management IP Address option enables deleting IP address entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list Delete All Network Management IP Addresses The Delete All Network Management IP Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges The Set Change Network Management IP address Ranges menu enables defining updating or deleting IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled Th
156. d connect the DC power cord to the 48 VDC IN jack of the BS PS DC power supply If a redundant power supply module is installed connect a DC power cord also to the second DC power module Connect the power cord s to the 48 VDC power source as follows a Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source b Connect the white wire to the Return contact Cc Connect the shield to the ground 9 If a BS PS AC power supply is used connect the AC power cord to the AC IN jack of the BS PS AC power supply If a redundant power supply module is installed connect an AC power cord also to the second AC power module Connect the power cord s to the mains outlet 10 Switch the BS PS AC DC power supplies to ON Verify that all power indicator LEDs on the BS PS AC DC front panel are ON and that the OVERTEMP alarm indicator is off Refer to Table 2 6 for a description of these LEDs 11 Configure the basic parameters in all BS AU modules as described Configuring Basic Parameters on page 65 12 Connect the 10 100 BaseT LAN connector s to the network The cable connection should be straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a hub switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network Interface Card NIC BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment INFORMATION MM The length of each of the Ethernet cables the cable connecting the i
157. d Maximum Modulation Level SNR Maximum Modulation Level SNR gt 23 dB 8 21 dB lt SNR lt 23 dB 7 16 dB lt SNR lt 21 dB 6 13 dB lt SNR lt 16 dB 5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level Table 3 3 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level Continued SNR Maximum Modulation Level 10 dB lt SNR lt 13 dB 4 8 dB lt SNR lt 10 dB 3 7 dB lt SNR lt 8 dB 2 6 dB lt SNR lt 7 dB 1 The maximum supported value depends on the unit s HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level according to the Sub Band BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O E 3 5 Chapter 3 Commissioning Operation Verification Operation Verification The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit Ethernet connection and data connectivity 3 5 1 Outdoor Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit examine the LED indicators located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications INFORMATION Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs as described below is only possible pe after the configuration and alignment processes are completed Table 3 4 AU ODU LED Name Description Functi
158. dBm 24dBm 26 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 5 24 dBm 26 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 4 26 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 3 27 dBm 27 dBm 27 dBm 2 27 dBm 27 dBm 1 27 dBm 4 2 6 2 8 1 2 Show Transmit Power Parameters This option displays the Transmit Power parameter and the current transmit power for the different modulation levels 4 2 6 2 8 2 Maximum Transmit Power SU only The Maximum Transmit Power submenu includes the following options HM Maximum Tx Power HM Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters 4 2 6 2 8 2 1 Maximum Tx Power The Maximum Tx Power parameter limits the maximum transmit power that can be reached by the ATPC algorithm It also sets the upper limits for the Transmit Power parameters The minimum value for the Maximum Tx Power is 10 dBm The maximum value depends on several unit properties and parameters M The HW revision of the unit M The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub Band BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub Band together with the value of the Antenna Gain In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some equipment types cannot exceed a certain value In these cases the Transmit Power cannot exceed the value of Maximum EIRP Antenna Gain For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the suppo
159. de Filter M Enable Ethernet AU SU Mf Disable Disable Yes Broadcast Multicast E Limit only Broadcast Packets ber Option E Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts E Limit All Multicast Packets including broadcast Ethernet AU SU 0 204800 packets second 50 Yes Broadcast Multicast Limiter Threshold Ethernet AU SU 1 60 minutes 5 minutes Yes Broadcast Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval Bridge Aging Time AU SU 20 2000 seconds 300 No Broadcast Multicast AU E Disable Broadcast Multi No Relaying E Broadcast Multicast Enable cast Enable E Broadcast Enable HB Multicast Enable BreezeACCESS System Manual 226 Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Unicast Relaying AU E Disable Enable No E Enable MAC Address List AU Up to 100 MAC addresses None empty Yes MAC Address List AU E Deny Deny Yes Action E Allow Station Allowed E Disable Enable Yes Option E Enable Roaming Option SU E Disable Disable No E Enable Ethernet Port Control SU E Disable Enable Yes E Enable Performance Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time RTS Threshold AU SU HW Revision C or higher E AU HW Revision Yes 20 4092 bytes A B 2200 HW Revision A B 20 2200 H AU HW Revision C or higher except in the 900 MHz band 4092 E AU in the 900 MHz band 60 E SU 60 Minimum Content
160. does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual F 1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action The Ethernet Integrity Indicator the yellow LED embedded in the Ethernet connector is off and or the Ethernet Activity Indicator the green embedded LED does not blink when there should be traffic on the Ethernet port Wrong type of Ethernet cable If connected directly to PC use a crossed cable Otherwise use a straight cable Faulty Ethernet cable Replace cable The unit does not respond to ping Wrong IP configuration Make sure that the PC is on the same subnet as the unit Wrong Ethernet port operation mode Make sure that the speed and duplex settings in the PC match the configuration in the unit the default is Auto Negotiation Wrong Management VLAN User Filtering Access to Management Make sure all relevant parameters are configured properly Appendix F Troubleshooting SU Association Problems If the IP parameters of the unit are unknown use the Set Factory Defaults utility to restore the def
161. dress SU IP address 0 0 0 0 none Yes Bridge Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time VLAN ID Data SU 1 4094 1 No VLAN ID AU SU 1 4094 65535 65535 no No Management VLAN VLAN Link Type AU SU Mf Hybrid Link Hybrid Link No E Trunk Link E Access Link only in SU E Service Provider Link M Extended Access Link only in SU M Extended Trunk Link only in SU VLAN Forwarding AU SU Disable Enable Disable No Support VLAN Forwarding ID AU SU 1 4094 Empty list No up to 20 entries VLAN Relaying AU Disable Enable Disable No Support VLAN Relaying ID AU 1 4094 Empty list No up to 20 entries VLAN Priority Data SU 0 7 0 No VLAN Priority AU SU 0 7 0 No Management VLAN QinQ Protocol AU SU 8100 9000 9100 9200 hex 8100 hex No Ethertype Hex BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time VLAN Extended Access SU E VLAN Rule Yes E Show Rule List VLAN ID Extended SU 1 4094 1 Yes Trunk VLAN ID Service SU 1 4094 1 No Provider Ethernet Broadcast SU E Disable Disable Yes Filtering Options M On Ethernet Port Only E On Wireless Port Only HM On Both Wireless and Ethernet Ports DHCP Broadcast SU E Disable Disable Yes Override Filter E Enable PPPoE Broadcast SU E Disable Disable Yes Override Filter E Enable ARP Broadcast SU E Disable Enable Yes Overri
162. dulation 1 8 If all the thresholds that were set up are reached the entire SNR bar will light up For instance if LEDs 2 5 and 6 have thresholds set for them the rest of the SNR LEDs are disabled and all these thresholds are reached instead of having only LEDs 2 5 and 6 light up all the SNR LEDs will light up 4 2 3 13 2 2 Show LED Starts This option displays all the threshold settings that were applied for each LED in the SNR bar 4 2 4 Basic Configuration Menu The Basic Configuration menu includes all parameters required for the initial installation and operation of the unit After the unit is properly installed and operational additional parameters can be configured either locally or remotely using Telnet or SNMP management INFORMATION All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the relevant sub menus of the mg Advanced Configuration menu The Basic Configuration menu enables to access the following parameter sets 4 2 4 1 IP Parameters M IP Address E Subnet Mask M Default Gateway Address M DHCP Client DHCP Option Access to DHCP Refer to section IP Parameters on page 117 for a description of these parameters 4 2 4 2 Performance Parameters M Maximum Modulation Level SU Refer to section Performance Parameters on page 177 for a description of these parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp E Q Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameter
163. dwidth3 2 86 dBm 88 dBm 7 dB 3 85 dBm 86 dBm 9 dB 4 83 dBm 84 dBm 11 dB 5 80 dBm 81 dBm 14 dB 6 76 dBm 77 dBm 18 dB 7 71 dBm 73 dBm 22 dB 8 gt 69 dBm 71 dBm 23 dB Modulation OFDM modulation 64 FFT points BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 1 System Description Specifications 1 The actual available frequency channels and bandwidth are defined by the selected Sub Band which reflects the applicable regulatory constraints For more details refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 The actual maximum available output power for each modulation level is defined by the selected Sub Band which reflects the applicable regulatory constraints For some countries the power may also be limited by limi tations on the maximum EIRP also included in the Sub Band parameters and the Antenna Gain parameter For more details refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 and to section Transmit Power on page 136 For information on specific HW and Country Code limitations see the Country Codes document 3 The sensitivity values are for a bandwidth of 20 MHz When using a 10 MHz bandwidth the sensitivity for each modulation level is 3 dB lower For a 5 MHz bandwidth 900 MHz band the sensitivity for each modulation level is 6 dB lower 4 Modulation Level indicates the radio transmission rate and the modulation scheme Modulation Le
164. e period the unit will reset automatically regaining normal operability upon start up BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ee 51 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION When performing calculations the Interference Mitigation mechanism also takes into consideration the n following parameters which are set in their specific menus M Antenna Gain see Antenna Gain on page 140 M Country Code see Country Code Parameters on page 206 as it affects EIRP and Maximum TX Power limits M TX Power AU see Transmit Power on page 136 and Maximum TX Power SU see Maximum Transmit Power SU only on page 137 M Sub band see Sub Band Select on page 130 as channel bandwidth affects Noise Floor which in turn affects maximum distance Make sure those parameters are properly configured before activating Interference Mitigation It is recommended to re run Interference Mitigation after changing any of the above 4 2 6 2 22 1 Basic Settings The Basic Settings menu is used for collecting the primary input required for the analysis process 4 2 6 2 22 1 1Installation Model This setting defines the sector s topography M 0 LOS Units have clear line of sight between them E 1 Near LOS Units have minor obstacles in their path which are easily avoidable through multipath E 2 Non LOS Units are obstructed and the signal must travel through longer paths or less permiss
165. e SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for high priority packets BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D 4 2 6 6 3 6 8 4 2 6 6 4 4 2 6 6 4 1 4 2 6 6 4 2 4 2 6 6 4 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or 0 to disable bursts for high priority packets The default is 8 2 milliseconds SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic The SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for low priority packets The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or 0 to disable bursts for low priority packets The default is 20 5 milliseconds DRAP Parameters AU only DRAP Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol is a protocol that can be used by the AU to communicate with Voice and Networking Gateways connected to SUs served by it enabling identification of these Gateways It also enables managing voice calls made by Voice Gateways VG The AU keeps track of all current voice calls and upon receiving from a VG a request for a new call compares the current number of calls to the maximum allowed number If the maximum allowed number has been reached the AU will not
166. e any number of cells each containing several Access Units for better coverage of densely populated areas BreezeACCESSVL can support sensitive applications through authentication and or data encryption utilizing WEP or AES algorithm with 128 bit keys FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards 197 certified encryption algorithm is available free of charge for all BreezeACCESSVL Access Units with HW revision C and higher The system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802 1Q enabling secure operation and Virtual Private Network VPN services and enabling tele workers or remote offices to conveniently access their enterprise network The system supports layer 2 traffic prioritization based on IEEE 802 1p and layer 3 traffic prioritization based on either IP ToS Precedence RFC791 or DSCP RFC2474 It also supports traffic prioritization based on UDP and or TCP port ranges In addition it may use the optional Wireless Link Prioritization WLP feature to fully support delay sensitive applications enabling Multimedia Application Prioritization MAP for high performance voice and video The implementation of MAP through the unique WLP protocol revolutionizes the business model by increasing for example the number of simultaneous VoIP calls per sector by as much as 500 BreezeACCESSVL products operate in unlicensed frequency bands in Time Division Duplex TDD mode using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM modulation with Forward E
167. e impact of the Hidden ESSID feature on the AU s operation is as follows M When the AU receives Probe Request form an SU it will check if the ESSID in the Probe Request is that same as its own ESSID It will generate the Probe Response only if there is a match BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ep Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M The Authentication process is not affected by the Hidden ESSID feature M When the AU receives an Association Request and the ESSID included in the frame matches its own ESSID the AU sends the Association Response with Status Code OK meaning that the SU is associated If there is no match the AU sends the Association Response with Status code Rejected meaning that SU is not associated and the reason of rejection wrong ESSID An SU that is trying to associate with AUs that are working with Hidden ESSID will keep a list with AUs that rejected The AU will be kept in this list until the Hidden ESSID Timeout expires for it or if the list is full and another AU that is not in the list rejects the SU because of wrong ESSID The AU that is working with Hidden ESSID enable will keep a counter that will be incremented for each SU that is rejected because of wrong ESSID The Operator ESSID feature still works when Hidden ESSID is enabled The only differences is that the Runtime ESSID displayed by SU when the SU is associated because of Operator ESSID will be the ESSID of the SU a
168. e similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this chapter does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESSSU L Product Manual 4 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Working with the Monitor Program Working with the Monitor Program 4 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet I Connect a PC to the Ethernet port using a crossed cable 2 Configure the PC s IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit The default IP address is 10 0 0 1 3 Run the Telnet program The Select Access Level menu is displayed 4 Select the required access level depending on your specific access rights A password entry request is displayed Table 4 1 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels Table 4 1 Default Passwords Access Rights Password Read Only public Installer user Administrator private INFORMATION Following three unsuccessful login attempts using incorrect passwords the monitor program is blocked for several minutes To enable access to the monitor program during that time the unit must be
169. e that is not too low according to Modulation level the Recommended Maximum Modulation Level table below Low throughput of Non optimal A value that is too low see the multicast broadcast traffic configuration of Recommended Maximum Modulation Multicast Modulation Level table below may degrade throughput of broadcast and multicast traffic BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Appendix F Troubleshooting Low Throughput Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action High retransmissions rate Interference Check for interference using the Spectrum problems Analysis Mode If necessary change the retransmissions rate operating frequency of the AU in excess of 15 Table F 1 Expected Throughput in Mbps TCP Traffic amp 20 MHz Bandwidth Burst Mode Enabled Concatenation Enabled Unit TCP Traffic Modulation Level 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SU 1 Uplink 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 Downlink 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 Aggregate 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Bi directional SU 3 Uplink 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 Downlink 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 Aggregate 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Bi directional SU 6 Uplink 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 Downlink 48 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 Aggregate 5 6 7 7 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 2 7 2 Bi directional SU 54 Uplink 4 7 6 7 8 9 12 4 15 8 21 25 1 26 4 Downlink 4 8 7 1 9 4 13 7 17 7 24
170. e their existing protected backup DC systems to feed the VL outdoor units For this purpose the unit comes with a 3 m DC cable with an RJ45 plug at one end that goes into the injector and 3 wires GND at the other end that will need to go into a plug suitable for the DC power source Figure 1 4 DC Power Injector Cable The DC Power Injector has two RJ45 jacks at one end see Figure 1 3 E WAN Eth For connection to the network BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O H D Chapter 1 System Description DC Power Injector M DCIN For connection to the DC power source via the supplied cable see Figure 1 4 The other end has another RJ45 jack for connecting to the outdoor unit via an Ethernet cable CAUTION When using the injector the following restrictions apply M The DC Power Injector does not include surge protection for either the DC or Ethernet input External protection devices are required for surge protection E The nominal output voltage is between 50 to 58 VDC with a DC load of 0 to 1 A If the nominal output is below 50 VDC the cable linking the IDU and ODU must be shorter than 100 m E The external power supply must support overcurrent short circuit protection with auto recovery function In case of overcurrent the power supply must turn off and on hiccup mechanism BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 1 System Description SU L Compatibility 1 5 SU L Compatibility When deploying
171. e to change its default DFS settings 4 2 6 2 3 2 1 4 2 6 2 3 2 2 When DFS is enabled the unit monitors the spectrum continuously searching for signals with a specific pattern indicating radar activity Upon detecting radar activity the unit immediately stops transmitting on this frequency and starts looking for another radar free frequency The subset of viable frequencies is configurable DFS implementation on the AU The AU maintains a continuously updated database of all applicable frequencies where each frequency is marked as Radar Free Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar The AU attempts to check a new frequency only if it is marked as Radar Free If there is no radar activity detected the units in the sector may use this frequency to communicate If a radar activity was detected on a certain frequency it will be marked in the database as a Radar Detected frequency The frequency will remain tagged as Radar Detected for a predefined period of time called Channel Avoidance Period After this period expires the frequency will be marked as Radar Free If radar activity was detected on a certain frequency adjacent channels should not be used as well according to the bandwidth For instance if the bandwidth is 20 MHz then if radar activity was detected in 5800 MHz frequencies 5790 MHz and 5810 MHz should not be used as well These frequencies are marked in the database as Adjacent to Radar and will be treated the same as Radar Det
172. echanism triggered by the number of received error packets may not function properly in certain scenarios resulting in link performances that are far below the expectations The option of manually controlling the various parameters used by the ANI mechanism enables to achieve optimal performance in certain deployments where the automatic ANI mechanism may not function properly BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters It is strongly recommended to consult with Alvarion s experts before switching to manual mode and modifying any of the parameters The general rules for using the Noise Immunity Control parameters are In the SU if performance Modulation Level is lower than expected based on the SNR try switching to Manual mode without changing any of the parameters CAUTION A Do not change any of the SU s Noise Immunity Control parameters except the Noise Immunity State Control from remote as it may result in loss of connectivity to the unit 4 2 6 2 17 1 4 2 6 2 17 2 4 2 6 2 17 3 In the AU try switching to Manual mode if overall throughput is too low or if SUs are lost although communication conditions are sufficient for good connectivity In many deployments the transition to Manual mode is sufficient If not you may try changing the Noise Immunity Level and or Spur Immunity Level parameters The target is to reduce the amount of Phy Error
173. ected frequencies DFS implementation on the SU When DFS is enabled on the SU the unit uses a channel availability check mechanism that is similar to the AU s Before associating to the AU the SU picks a Radar Free frequency and M If the frequency was previously scanned and tagged as available it immediately associates to the AU INFORMATION Some country codes require a periodical revalidation of the Radar Free frequencies So additionally it might be required for the channel validation period not to have expired as well BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O O Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M If the frequency is currently tagged as Radar Free as a result of a Radar Detected status that expired or in some cases if the Radar Free validation has expired see the note above the SU will initiate its own channel availability check As a result If no radar signal is detected the SU associates to the AU If the SU detects a radar it will tag the frequency in its own database as Radar Detected notify the AU and attempt to connect on another channel While associated the SU also performs In Service Monitoring meaning that it periodically scans the operating channel for radar signals If radar is detected it will notify the AU and stop transmitting on the respective frequency ETSI requirements enforce particular implementations for the DFS functionality on CPEs Implementations of
174. ed by the Bridge Aging Time parameter and the maximum number of entries permitted for this table which is 1020 Continuous Noise Floor Display AU only The Continuous Noise Floor Display option displays continuously updated information regarding the average noise floor in the wireless link It also displays continuously updated information about the Signal Interference Ratio Signal Interference Ratio SIR is the average SNR for all pulses and physical errors received by the unit The average has the same formula used for calculation of SNR per CPE Click the Esc key to abort the display Hidden ESSID Table SU only An SU with Hidden ESSID Support enabled for details see ESSID Parameters on page 119 that maintains a list with AUs that rejected association requests from the SU because of a wrong ESSID An AU will be kept in this list until the Hidden ESSID Timeout expires for it or if the list is full and another AU that is not in the list rejects the SU because of wrong ESSID The Hidden ESSID Table displays for each AU included in the list its MAC Address and Age elapsed time in minutes since it was added to the table BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 4 2 5 7 4 2 5 8 4 2 5 8 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Per Modulation Level Counters The Per Modulation Level Counters display statistics relating to wireless link performance at different radio modulation levels The Per
175. elow 4 0 tries to associate with an AU that has the Wireless Link Prioritization feature enable the AU will generate a trap that will include information about this SU In this way the system administrator can be alerted that the SU should be upgraded This is necessary because otherwise an SU that does not support the Wireless Link Prioritization feature will send all the traffic as high priority CAUTION Verify that all SUs served by an AU with the Wireless Link Prioritization Option enabled use a SW version that supports this feature SW version 4 0 and higher Otherwise overall performance and quality of A service in the cell may be reduced since all data from an SU with SW version below 4 0 will be sent with high priority The Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters menu includes the following 4 2 6 6 3 6 1 Wireless Link Prioritization Option The Wireless Link Prioritization Option enables or disables the Wireless Link Prioritization feature BreezeACCESS VL System Manual D amp amp 200 4 2 6 6 3 6 2 4 2 6 6 3 6 3 4 2 6 6 3 6 4 4 2 6 6 3 6 5 4 2 6 6 3 6 6 4 2 6 6 3 6 7 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default option is Disable Low Priority AIFS The Low Priority AIFS defines the AIFS number of time slots that will be used by the AU and the SUs served by it for low priority traffic The range is from 3 to 50 time slots The default is 3 Number of HW Retries for High
176. em and how to install operate and manage the system components This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing setting up and operating the BreezeACCESSVL system and for system administrators responsible for managing the system This manual contains the following chapters and appendices E Chapter 1 System description Describes the BreezeACCESSVL system and its components E Chapter 2 Installation Describes how to install the system components M Chapter 3 Commissioning Describes how to configure basic parameters align the Subscriber Unit antenna and validate unit operation E Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Describes how to use the BreezeACCESSVL Monitor application for configuring parameters checking system status and monitoring performance M Appendix A Software Version Loading Using TFTP Describes how to load a new software version using TFTP E Appendix B File Download and Upload Using TFTP Describes how to download and upload configuration files using TFTP This procedure is also applicable for uploading country code and feature license files M Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility Describes how to use the Set Factory Defaults utility to enable management access to units where wrong or unknown configuration disables regular access to the unit for management purposes M Appendix D Preparing the indoor to outdoor SU cable Provides details on preparation of the indoo
177. ended Maximum Modulation Level SNR Maximum Modulation Level SNR gt 23 dB 21 dB lt SNR lt 23 dB 16 dB lt SNR lt 21 dB 10 dB lt SNR lt 13 dB 8 dB lt SNR lt 10 dB 8 7 6 13 dB lt SNR lt 16 dB 5 4 3 2 7 dB lt SNR lt 8 dB 6 dB lt SNR lt 7 dB 1 The maximum supported value depends on the unit s HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level according to the Sub Band 4 2 6 5 6 Control Modulation Level This feature controls the modulation for ACK frames sent by the unit The ACK modulation can either be set dynamically based on the modulation of the frame it acknowledges or it can be enforced to modulation level 1 The latter is particularly useful for asymmetric links For instance if one unit in the link is capable of receiving frames in modulation 8 while the other can only receive in modulation 2 in theory one of the units should send its data traffic using modulation 8 However unless it receives the corresponding ACK feedback in modulation 2 or 1 it will not be able to synchronize and will bring its own Tx modulation down as a result Setting the ACK modulation to level 1 at the other side of the link will fix this allowing the unit to acknowledge that frames sent in modulation 8 are successfully received The available options are M Basic Rate Sets 3 modulation thresholds for the sent ACK frames depending on the modulation of the received f
178. ene 84 425 Unit Control Meru svada aaa 88 4 2 4 Basic Configuration MenU s sssssssesissrisrsrnnannnnnnninnnunnnann nnmnnn nananana aneneen nanna 101 4 2 5 Site Survey Neve eG ed 104 4 2 6 Advanced Configuration Menu ss ssssssssssssrsssnnrnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna 116 Appendix A Software Version Loading Using TFTP nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 207 Appendix B File Download and Upload Using TFTP sceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 210 Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility arnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 212 Appendix D Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable arnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 214 Appendix E Parameters Summary arnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 216 E l Parameters Sumann svuae eesersssrmaakakndednkelee eee 217 ELT Unit Control PATA RCTS seccdcccieuevsasateatxadaneweleten innate ete aemdue 217 EL gt IP Parameters sisene aE r Aaaa SA 218 E 1 3 Air Interface Parameters ssssssssessssssunnnerunrnunnnnrunnennunnnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnen nennen 219 E 1 4 Network Management ParametersS rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennr 224 BreezeACCESS System Manual 8 e Contents E 1 5 Bridge Parameters eres 225 E 1 6 Performance ParametersS a nrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenenenenene 227 E 1 7 Service Parameters a annnnnnnnnnnnnnn
179. ent Alvarion is not liable for any injury damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation grounding or lightning protection 2 3 1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit INFORMATION o This section is not applicable for the new smaller size ODU For details on pole mounting the new ODU refer to section 2 3 2 The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a pole using one of the following options M Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit enabling to use the special clamps for mounting the unit on diverse pole diameters M Special grooves on the sides of the unit enable the use of metal bands to secure the unit to a pole The bands must be 9 16 inches wide and at least 12 inches long The metal bands are not included with the installation package INFORMATION Be sure to mount the unit with the bottom panel which includes the LED indicators facing downward BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp E amp Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit Grooves for Insertion of 9 16 Metal Band Threaded holes Figure 2 1 Threaded Holes Grooves Figure 2 2 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole using the clamps and threaded rods Figure 2 2 3 Pole Installation Using Special Clamps BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp va Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoo
180. ent Log is configurable Events from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed upon request Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current active events In the log an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased a maximum of 1000 events may be stored The Event Log may be read using TFTP with remote file name lt SNMP Read Community gt log the default SNMP Read Community is public The Event Log may also be uploaded to a remote FTP server The Event Log Menu includes the following options E Event Log Policy M Display Event Log M Erase Event Log M Event Load Upload Event Log Policy The Event Log Policy determines the minimal severity level All events whose severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O D 4 2 3 9 2 4 2 3 9 3 4 2 3 9 4 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Valid values are Message MSG Level Warning WRN Level Error ERR Level Fatal FTL Level Log None The default selection is Warning Level severity Display Event Log The Display Event Log option enables viewing how many events are logged and selecting the number of events to be displayed up to 1000 The display of each event includes the event time elapsed time since last reset the severity level and a message string The events are displayed according to the time at which they were generated w
181. enus and Parameters Table 4 21 Retransmission Percentage Equivalence Modulation PHY Rate PHY Rate Difference Retransmission Percentage Level Mbps Compared to Previous Equivalent to PHY Rate Modulation Mbps Difference 8 54 54 48 6 6 54 11 7 48 48 36 12 12 48 25 6 36 36 24 12 12 36 33 5 24 24 18 6 6 24 25 4 18 18 12 6 6 18 33 3 12 12 9 3 3 12 25 2 9 9 6 3 3 9 33 1 6 When the above mentioned retransmission percentages are reached the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm will lower the modulation If the connection is stable on a particular modulation the unit will periodically check whether it can further increase the modulation except on modulation 8 by sending a number of test packets using this higher modulation and checking the retransmission rate The user can configure a Packet Threshold to Test Up Rate parameter to define the number of successfully transmitted frames after which the unit will test the higher modulation The number of frames used for this test can also be configured by the user via the Packet No On Upper Rate parameter When a frame needs to be retransmitted the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm may gradually decrease the modulation used for retransmitting that particular frame Based on the Number of HW retries parameter see Number of HW Retries on page 181 for more details the unit will try to perform the three final retran
182. er down message If the distance between the value of the Current Transmit Power and the desired range is smaller than the step size the power up power down message will include the specific step value required for this condition Valid range 1 20 dB Default value 5 dB 4 2 6 2 8 4 ATPC Parameters in SU 4 2 6 2 8 4 1 ATPC Option The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm The parameter takes effect immediately However when changed from Enable to Disable the transmit power level will remain at the last Current Transmit Power determined by the ATPC algorithm before it was disabled It will change to the value configured for the Initial Transmit Power parameter only after the next reset or following loss of synchronization The default is Enable INFORMATION The accuracy of the Transmit Power level is typically 1 dB However at levels that are 15 dB or more below the maximum supported by the hardware the accuracy is 3 dB for information on hardware limitations refer to the Country Codes document At these levels the use of ATPC may cause significant fluctuations in the power level of the transmitted signal When operating at such low levels it is recommended to disable the ATPC Option and to set the Transmit Power parameter to the average Tx Power level before the ATPC was disabled BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 4 2 6 2 8 5 4 2 6 2 9 4 2 6 2 10 C
183. erformed currently Active or Inactive MI Last Field Calibration Result Indicating the result of the last Field calibration process Passed Failed or None if no Field calibration has been done BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp op 150 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Bandwidth Used for Last Field Calibration The bandwidth used by the device during the last Field Calibration A new Field Calibration should be performed after changing the bandwidth sub band used by the device M Available Calibration Options Indicating whether Field Factory or both Field and Factory Calibration options are available for selection M Selected Calibration Option The currently selected Calibration Option to Use 4 2 6 2 20 Beacon Period AU only This parameter sets the time interval in ms between consecutive beacon frames exchanged between the AU and all the associated SUs The allowed range is between 16 and 160 ms with 16 ms increments If the entered value is not a 16 multiple the nearest 16 multiple will be used instead The default is 160 ms 4 2 6 2 21 Max Beacons Lost AU only This parameter defines after how many consecutive lost beacon frames an associated SU will drop the link The allowed range is between 3 and 64 beacon frames The default is 8 4 2 6 2 22 Interference Mitigation VL 900 only The Interference Mitigation functionality allows users to configure the unit s operating channel a
184. ers Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Tx Control AU E Off On Yes E On E Ethernet Status Control Antenna Gain AU Minimum 0 dBi According to the No xxx t lied ar Maximum 50 or Regulation aes on Max EIRP 10 the lower of the two values Spectrum Analysis AU SU 2 30 seconds 5 seconds Yes Channel Scan Period Configure d per analysis Spectrum Analysis AU SU 1 100 cycles 2 cycles Yes l Sean L yee Configure d per analysis Automatic Channel AU E Disable Disable Yes Lost Beacons AU 100 1000 0 means Not 218 Yes Watchdog Threshold Used Noise Immunity State AU SU M Automatic Automatic Yes Noise Immunity Level AU SU 0 4 0 Yes Use only 0 or 4 Spur Immunity Level AU SU 0 7 0 Yes OFDM Weak Signal AU SU O not active or 1 active 0 Yes Pulse Detection AU SU Low Low Yes Sensitivity E High Noise Floor AU SU Bl Fully Automatic Fully Automatic Yes Calculation Mode E Forced E Automatic with Minimum Value BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Noise Floor Forced AU SU 107 to 55 dBm 5 MHz bandwidth Yes Value 102 10 MHz bandwidth 99 20 MHz bandwidth 96 Select Calibration AU SU I None None Yes Option to Use E Field E Factory not available in current release Beacon Period
185. ers broadcast messages received from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports The default selection is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Gs 72 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 3 4 2 6 4 2 4 4 2 6 4 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters DHCP Broadcast Override Filter The DHCP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of DHCP messages Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter broadcast messages should be filtered DHCP broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable Select from the following options M Disable DHCP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter E Enable DHCP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Disable PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter The PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet messages Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter broadcast messages should be filtered PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable Select from the following options M Disable PPPoE Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter E Ena
186. ersion 4 0 July 2006 Basic Configuration Menu Section 4 2 4 Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters SW Version 4 0 July 2006 MIB Appendix E Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Parameters Summary Appendix F Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Using the Feature License Web Application Removed previously Appendix G Available as a separate document SW Version 4 0 July 2006 New Subscriber Unit SU A ODU Added New SU A ODU and accessories SW Version 4 0 Rev B August 2006 New Subscriber Unit SU I Added new unit SU I and accessories SW Version 4 0 Rev C August 2006 SU A H removed Sections 1 3 1 1 8 1 1 9 5 1 1 21 121 SU A H SU with horizontally polarized integrated antenna was removed from products list SW Version 4 0 27 October 2006 IDU PS1036 removed from Manual Sections 1 9 5 1 1 9 5 4 2 4 3 52 Replaced by PS1073 SW Version 4 0 27 October 2006 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Q in Q Service Provider Link improvements Sections 4 2 6 4 1 2 4 2 6 4 1 3 4 4 2 6 4 1 8 MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F Improved handling of management frames Support of Ethertypes 9100 9200 h
187. es deleting IP address range entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list Delete All User Filtering Entries The Delete All User Filtering Entries option enables deleting all entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list DHCP Unicast Override Filter When user filtering is activated unicast DHCP messages are filtered out therefore the unit cannot communicate with the DHCP server The DHCP Unicast Override Filter option enables to overcome this problem When enabled unicast DHCP messages pass overriding the user filtering mechanism The default is Disable DHCP Unicast PPPoE Override Filter AU only When user filtering is activated PPPoE packets are filtered out The PPPoE Override Filter option enables to overcome this problem When enabled PPPoE packets pass overriding the user filtering mechanism The default is Disable Show User Filtering Parameters The Show All User Filtering Parameters option displays the current value of the User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses subnet masks and ranges MIR and CIR Parameters The CIR Committed Information Rate specifies the minimum data rate guaranteed to the relevant subscriber The MIR Maximum Information Rate value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions provided such bandwidth is available Under normal conditions the actual Information Rate IR is between the applicable CIR and MIR values based on the formula IR CIR K MIR
188. es range from 300 to 10000 milliseconds The default value is 5000 milliseconds Proportional IR Factor Parameters SU only When an SU operates at low modulations the MIR values may become irrelevant A device that due to environment limitations always transmits at lower modulations needs more time to reach the MIR values than devices that transmit at high modulations In this situation the MIR CIR algorithm is not able to deliver an adequate level of fairness The Proportional IR Factor PIF addresses this issue Using this factor the MIR CIR values used by the device will be adjusted Depending on the average rate modulation used and the Proportional IR Factor the MIR CIR values employed by the MIR algorithm will be calculated as an average The average rates for uplink and downlink are calculated periodically If the difference between the current average rate and the previous average rate exceeds a predefined percentage Threshold Percentage from the configured rate and the current average rate is lower than a specific threshold Threshold Rate then the respective MIR CIR values for uplink or downlink will be recalculated Since the used MIR CIR values must be calculated for both uplink and downlink there will be two values for MIR Used Uplink MIR and Used Downlink MIR and two values for CIR Used Uplink CIR and Used Downlink CIR If at least one of these four MIR CIR values is updated a reassociation is required in order
189. est upper modulations The available range is between 1 and 3 The default value is 3 4 2 6 5 10 3 3Retries on Lower Modulations This option enables disables the retransmissions on lower modulations mechanism described Statistics Based Rate Control Parameters on page 183 The default value is Enable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 5 10 3 4RTS Duration Mode 4 2 6 5 10 4 If the RTS mechanism is enabled when attempting to retransmit frames on lower modulations the RTS employed may be adjusted so that it pertains to either the initial transmission modulation or the lower retransmission modulation The available options are E Short RTS Duration Retransmission attempts on lower modulations use the RTS duration that applies to the initial transmission modulation M Long RTS Duration Retransmission attempts on lower modulations use the RTS duration that applies to the corresponding lower retransmission modulation The default value is Short RTS Duration Adaptive Modulation Parameters This submenu configures parameters for the basic Adaptive Modulation algorithm When enabled the algorithm supports decrease increase of transmission s modulation levels between the lowest possible level to the value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter If the Maximum Modulation Level is set at the lowest possible level the Adaptive Modulatio
190. estimating SNR values and for decisions on existence of signals in the channel In some cases especially when a very strong signal exists in neighboring channels the noise floor calculated by the built in mechanism may be significantly below the actual noise floor level Typically the expected noise floor level is E 5 MHz bandwidth 102 dBm M 10 MHz bandwidth 99 dBm M 20 MHz bandwidth 96 dBm The default calculation mode is Fully Automatic using only the built in mechanism If you experience problems in the wireless link such as excessively long association process or very low throughput it may be caused by errors in noise floor calculation In this case it is recommended to perform a Spectrum Analysis see section Spectrum Analysis on page 144 and view the Average Noise Floor values If the calculated Noise Floor is lower by more than 5 dB from the expected value it is recommended to change the calculation mode to Automatic with Minimum Value using the expected value as the minimum Forced Value BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 4 2 6 2 18 1 4 2 6 2 18 2 4 2 6 2 18 3 4 2 6 2 19 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Note that if the SNR of received signals is very low typically below 10 dB it is recommended to maintain the default calculation mode Fully Automatic Changing the calculation mode to Automatic with Minimum Value may result in loss of connectivity with unit
191. et switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is always on enabling immediate access to services There are three types of Subscriber Units M The SU A E series where each unit comprises an Indoor Unit and an Outdoor Unit with or without an integrated antenna These products are intended for installation by a professional installer enabling long range connectivity M The SU I series of all indoor Subscriber Unit intended for installation by non professional end users in locations that are close to the Base Station M The SU L series which provides an entry level cost optimized subscriber unit alternative supporting SU A like features and performance INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this manual does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual 1 3 1 In addition there is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit the SU E BS where the indoor unit is designed for installation in the Base Station chassis The SU E
192. eturning to the original channel under certain conditions that indicates low radar activity on the channel Table 4 7 Comparison Between DFS Implementations for Various Country Codes on the SU Action Parameter ETSI 5 4 GHz ETSI 5 8 GHz Universal FCC When reverting DFS Option According to According to false According to the unit to country code country code country code factory default definition definition definition settings When DFS Option false According to false Unchanged upgrading country code from a previous definition software version BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 4 2 6 2 4 4 2 6 2 4 1 4 2 6 2 4 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 7 Comparison Between DFS Implementations for Various Country Codes on the SU Action Parameter ETSI 5 4 GHz ETSI 5 8 GHz Universal FCC When DFS Option According to According to false E AU changing the country code country code According to country code definition definition country code definition E SU false Channel 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec Check Time 600 sec for 600 sec for freq between freq between 5600 and 5600 and 5650 MHz 5650 MHz Channel 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min Avoidance Period Minimum 4 4 4 4 Pulses to Detect Frequency According to According to According to ALL Subset country code country code corresponding Definition def
193. ex SW Version 4 0 27 October 2006 DRAP UDP Port Section 4 2 6 6 4 2 Parameters Summary Appendix F Default changed to 8171 SW Version 4 0 27 October 2006 MIR CIR parameters of SU I Table 4 23 Table 4 24 MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F Updated SW Version 4 0 27 February 2007 AUS supports also SU I Section 1 2 Updated functionality SW Version 4 0 27 February 2007 Password Recovery Section 4 1 1 New feature a procedure for password recovery if password was lost forgotten SW Version 4 0 27 February 2007 AP Client IP Address Sections 4 2 6 3 8 Table 4 3 MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F New feature SW Version 4 0 27 February 2007 Noise Immunity Control Section 4 2 6 2 17 Table 4 3 Parameters Summary Appendix F New feature SW Version 4 0 27 February 2007 Show Unit Status Section 4 2 2 1 Added Country Code Serial Number and ATE Test Status SW Version 4 5 June 2007 Wireless Rx Events Section 4 2 5 1 2 Added Other counter SW Version 4 5 June 2007 Broadcast Relaying Section 4 2 6 4 5 Parameters Summary Appendix E New functionality Name changed from Broadcast Relaying to Broadcast Multicast Relaying SW Version 4 5 June 2007 MIR Threshold Percent Sections 4 2 6 6 2 4 2 6 6 2 10 Parameters Summary Appendix E New MIR CIR parameter SW Version 4 5 June 2
194. f parameters that affect the prioritization of traffic in the wireless link for packets with high low priority from different units VLAN Priority Threshold The VLAN Priority Threshold is applicable for Trunk and Hybrid Links only It enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold If the VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter the packet will be routed to the High queue If the VLAN Priority field is lower than or equal to this value the packet will be transferred to the Low queue unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is 7 which means that all packets get a low priority equivalent to disabling the VLAN based classifier ToS Prioritization The ToS Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance with either the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header in accordance with RFC 791 or the 6 DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point bits in accordance with RFC 2474 The ToS Prioritization menu includes the following parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp es 4 2 6 6 3 2 1 4 2 6 6 3 2 2 4 2 6 6 3 2 3 4 2 6 6 3 3 4 2 6 6 3 3 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters ToS Prioritization Option The ToS Prioritization Option defines whether ToS based prioritization is enabled or disabled The following options are available
195. g is used M Probe Response generated by the AU as a response when the AU receives a Probe Request from an SU This unicast frame is sent only to the SU that has sent the Probe Request and it is sent only if the ESSID received in the Probe Request is the same as the AU s ESSID M The ESSID will be present also in the Association Request frame sent by SUS The impact of the Hidden ESSID feature on the SU s operation is as follows M ifthe Hidden ESSID Support parameter in the SU is set to Disable the SU will not try to Associate with an AU that is working with Hidden ESSID Enabled M ifthe Hidden ESSID Support parameter in the SU is set to Enable the SU will try to Associate with an AU that is working with Hidden ESSID The SU will send the Association Request that will contain the ESSID of the SU the AU will check the SU s ESSID versus its own ESSID and if there is a match the AU will associate the SU If the SU uses a different ESSID the AU will reject it and the Association Response will include the reason for rejection The SU will add this AU to a table that contains the AUs that rejected it because of wrong ESSID and it will not try again to associate with this AU until the Hidden ESSID Timeout expires M if Hidden ESSID Support parameter in the SU is set to Enable and the SU finds an AU that is not working with Hidden ESSID the SU will try to associate with this AU only if the AU s ESSID Operator ESSID is the same as the SU s ESSID Th
196. g packet size The available range is from 60 to 1472 bytes The default value is 64 bytes E Ping Frame Timeout The ping frame timeout which is the amount of time in ms between ping attempts The available range is from 100 to 60 000 ms The default value is 200 ms M Start Sending Starts the transmission of ping frames E Stop Sending Stops the transmission of ping frames The test is automatically ended when the number of pings has reached the value specified in the No of Pings parameter described above The Stop Sending option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of pings or if continuous pinging is selected M Show Ping Test Values Displays the current values of the ping test parameters the transmission status which means whether it is currently sending or not sending pings the number of pings sent and the number of pings received which means the number of acknowledged frames Link Quality SU only The Link Quality submenu enables viewing continuously updated information on the quality of the wireless link The Link quality submenu includes the following options Continuous Average SNR RSSI Display The Continuous Average SNR Display option displays continuously updated information regarding the average quality of the received signal using Signal to Noise Ratio SNR and Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI measurements The average RSSI is calculated using the formula NewAvgRSSI
197. g to insert an ethernet cable with an already assembled RJ 45 connector through the cap To expose the groove lightly squeeze the cap Carefully insert the cable with the assembled connector through the groove Groove Figure 2 11 Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap 2 Connect the Ethernet cable to the IDU COM RJ 45 connector 3 Put the sealing cap back in its place Make sure that the small protrusion on the side of the cap fits inside the hole on the connector s protective body BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp o Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit Figure 2 12 Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap 4 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 5 Assemble a shielded RJ 45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the IDU ODU cable See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O D Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit 2 4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf Alternatively it may be wall mounted using the kit supplied with the unit Figure 2 13 IDU PS 1073 Front Panel The RADIO connector and RESET button are located on the front panel the ETHERNET connector is located on the side panel and LEDs are located on the top panel CAUTION Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO p
198. h Gateway the displayed information includes Gateway Type VG 1D1V VG 1D2V NG 4D1W IP Address Number of Voice Calls applicable only to Voice Gateways BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ep 113 4 2 5 4 2 4 2 5 5 4 2 5 6 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters MAC Address Database in SU The MAC Address Database option in the SU displays information regarding the Subscriber Units bridging forwarding information The following option is available M Display Bridging and Association Info The Display Bridging and Association Info option displays a list of all the stations in the SU s Forwarding Database Each MAC address entry is followed by a description which may include the following Et Ethernet An address learned from the Ethernet port St Static The associated AU WI Wireless An address of a node behind the associated AU learned via the wireless port Sp Special 4 addresses that are always present including The MAC address of the SU Alvarion s Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 01 The system treats this address as a Broadcast address Alvarion s special Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 05 reserved for future use The Ethernet Broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info The summary table includes the current number of entries the aging time specifi
199. h external antenna 1 Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector on the unit 2 Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna 3 The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ea Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit Figure 2 7 Bottom Panel of the ODU all ODUs except to new ODU shown without the sealing assembly Oro mn Figure 2 9 Bottom Panel of the New 0 9 GHz ODU without the IDU COM Sealing Cap INFORMATION The MAC Address of the unit is marked on both the ODU and the indoor unit on the print side of the BS AU module or on the bottom side of the Universal IDU If for any reason the ODU is not used with the IDU with which it was shipped the MAC Address of the system is in accordance with the marking on the ODU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual R O Q Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit 2 3 5 Connecting the Indoor to Outdoor Cable 2 3 5 1 Units with an Installed Waterproof Seal not applicable to new ODU To connect the indoor to outdoor cable 1 Remove the two screws holding the waterproof seal to the outdoor unit and remove the waterproof seal 2 Unscrew the top nut from the waterproof seal Figure 2 10 The Waterproof Seal 3 Route a straight Category 5E Ethernet cable 8 wire 24 AWG through both the top nut and the waterproof seal
200. h the Monitor Program on page 81 for a list of the default passwords for each of the access levels Flash Memory Control The Flash Memory Control submenu enables selecting the active software version for the unit The flash memory can store two software versions One version is called Main and the other is called Shadow New software versions are loaded as the shadow version You can select the shadow version as the new active version by selecting Reset and Boot from Shadow Version However after the next reset the main version is re activated To continue using the currently active version after the next reset select Use Running Version After Reset The previous shadow version will be the new main version and vice versa The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of loading new software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or additional changes in the list of parameters New parameters are loaded with their default values Select from the following options E Reset and Boot from Shadow Version Activates the shadow backup software version The unit is reset automatically Following the next reset the unit will switch to the main version M Use Running Version After Reset Defines the current running version as the new main version This version will also be used following the next reset Log Out Timer The Log Out Timer parameter determines the amount of inactive time following which
201. hapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Tx Control AU only The Tx Control option enables turning Off On the AU s transmitter or having the AU Tx status controlled by the status of the Ethernet port link If the selected option is Ethernet Status Control then M if the Ethernet link is down the AU transmitter will be switched to Off M ifthe Ethernet link is up the AU transmitter will be switched to On This feature can be used during maintenance or testing to avoid transmissions using undesired parameters The parameter is available only when managing the unit from its Ethernet port The default is On Antenna Gain The Antenna Gain parameter enables to define the net gain of a detached antenna The configured gain should take into account the attenuation of the cable connecting the antenna to the unit The Antenna Gain is important especially in countries where there is a limit on the EIRP allowed for the unit the maximum allowed value for the Transmit Power parameters cannot exceed the value of EIRP Antenna Gain where the EIRP is defined in the selected Sub Band In certain units with an integral antenna the Antenna Gain is not available as a configurable parameter However it is available as a read only parameter in the applicable Show menus The lower limit for the Antenna Gain parameter is 0 dBi The upper limit for the Antenna Gain is Regulation Max EIRP 10 in dBi since the minimum Tx Power is
202. he Cell Distance Mode is set to Automatic The Options are Automatic or Manual The default is Automatic Maximum Cell Distance The Maximum Cell Distance parameter allows configuring the maximum distance when the Cell Distance Mode option is Manual BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Ko amp 4 2 6 2 10 3 4 2 6 2 10 4 4 2 6 2 10 5 4 2 6 2 11 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The range is 0 to 54 Km The value of 0 has a special meaning for No Compensation Acknowledge Time Out is set to a value representing the maximum distance of 54 km The time slot size is set to its minimal value of 9 microseconds The default is 0 No Compensation Fairness Factor The Fairness Factor enables to define the level of fairness in providing services to different SUs When set to 100 all SUs have the same probability of getting services when competing for bandwidth If set to X then SUs located up to X of the maximum distance from the AU will have an advantage in getting services over SUs located farther than this distance The range is 0 to 100 The default is 100 Per SU Distance Learning The Per SU Distance Learning option defines the mode in which SUs calculate the ACK timeout based on the maximum cell distance or on the actual distance from the AU When this feature is disabled all SUs in the cell use for the calculation of the ACK timeout the maximum cell distance when enabled each
203. he SU from the Associations Database will take place between 6 to 16 minutes from the time the SU ceased sending data or responding to these keep alive frames for AUS the sampling interval is 1 minute meaning decision time of 6 to 7 minutes Therefore the database of associated SUs may include units no longer associated with the AU If the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter the selected AU cannot serve additional SUs To view the current number of associated SUs use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu To delete inactive SUs from the database you must either disassociate them see Disassociate AU only on page 146 or reset the AU 4 2 6 2 13 4 2 6 2 14 4 2 6 2 14 1 Wireless Link Trap Threshold AU only The Wireless Link Trap Threshold parameter defines the threshold for the wireless quality trap indicating that the quality of the wireless link has dropped below on trap or has increased above off trap the specified threshold The Wireless Link Trap Threshold is in percentage of retransmissions and the allowed range is from 1 to 100 The default is 30 Spectrum Analysis Gaining knowledge of the noise characteristics per channel enables construction of a relatively noise free working environment In order to gain information regarding noise characteristics in the location of the unit the unit will enter passive sc
204. he working mode of the MAC list M In the case of an Allowed list if the MAC address is included in the list the SU will be able to associate itself with the AU and receive permission for generating traffic if it is not found in the list it will still be associated but without the permission to generate traffic BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp a 175 4 2 6 4 7 4 4 2 6 4 7 5 4 2 6 4 8 4 2 6 4 9 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M In the case of a Deny list if the MAC address is included in the list the SU will be able to associate itself with the AU but will not be able to generate traffic otherwise if the address is not found in the list the SU will be associated and will be able to generate traffic Possible options for this parameter are Deny and Allow The default is Deny Station Allowed Option Set this parameter to Enable to allow any SU regardless of its MAC address to try associating with the AU Set it to Disable to allow only SUs whose MAC address starts with 00 10 E7 to try associating with the AU The default is Enabled Show MAC Address List Select Show MAC Address List to display the current list of MAC Addresses included in the List and the selected List Action Roaming Option SU only The Roaming Option defines the roaming support of the unit When roaming is not expected it is preferable to set this parameter to Disable This will cause the unit to start sc
205. ht RADIO 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs AU ODU INDOOR 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected BS PS AC AC IN 3 PIN AC power plug BS PS DC 48 VDC 3 pin DC D Type 3 power pins plug Amphenol 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6 Antenna RF N Type jack on a 1 5m cable in the Omni 8 5 8 Table 1 21 Ethernet Pin Out Assignments Radio Power Pins 4 amp 7 Power 5 amp 8 Power 56V 1 9 5 3 3 Electrical Table 1 22 Electrical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment Unit Details General 240W max for a fully equipped chassis 1 PS 6 AU BS PS AC AC power input 85 265 VAC 47 65 Hz DC power output 54 V 3 3 V BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Table 1 22 Electrical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment Continued Unit Details BS PS DC DC power input 48 VDC nominal 34 to 72 10 A max DC power output 54 V 3 3 V BS AU 3 3 VDC 54 VDC from the power supply module s via the back plane AU ODU 54 VDC from the BS AU over the indoor outdoor Ethernet cable AU E BS IDU ODU Power consumption 30W 1 9 5 4 Standalone Access Unit 1 9 5 4 1 Mechanical Table 1 23 Mechanical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit Unit Structure Dimensions cm Weight kg General An IDU indoor u
206. iant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 E AU Ant 5G 17 90 16 5 dBi typical 4 900 5 150 GHz 90 AZ x 6 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 E AU Ant 5G 15 120 15 dBi typical 5 150 5 875 GHz 120 AZ x 6 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 E AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 15 dBi typical 4 900 5 100 GHz 124 AZ x 6 5 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 E AU Ant 4 9G 9 Omni 9 dB typical i 4 900 5 100 GHz 360 AZ x 8 EL vertical polarization E AU Ant 5 4G 8 Omni 8 dBi typical 5 150 5 725 GHz 360 AZ x 4 5 EL vertical polarization E AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni 8 dBi typical 5 725 5 875 GHz 360 AZ x 9 EL vertical polarization E AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK 14dBi typical 5 725 5 850 GHz 120 AZ x 6 59 EL sector antenna vertical polarization The antenna pattern complies with Ofcom s IR 2007 EIRP profiles E Ant 0 9G V H 10 90 2x10dBi typical 902 928 MHz dual vertical horizontal polarization 90 AZ x 16 EL for Vpol 90 AZ x 19 EL for Hpol E AU Ant 0 9G 7 Omni 7dBi typical 902 928 MHz 360 AZ x 17 EL vertical polarization Sensitivity Modulation Level Sensitivity HW Sensitivity HW Minimum SNR Minimum dBm at Rev A Rev B and higher OEO PR 1 87 dBm 89 dBm 6 dB PER lt 10 20 MHz ban
207. icable local radio regulations 3 1 3 Transmit Power Compliance With Regulations CAUTION In regions where local radio regulations limit the maximum transmit power of the unit the installer is A responsible to properly set the Antenna Gain parameter if configurable according to the actual antenna being used This will limit the upper limits of the Tx Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power in the SU where applicable to the value of Permitted EIRP Antenna Gain The Tx Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power in the SU where applicable should not exceed the Permitted EIRP Antenna Gain according to the following table BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters Table 3 2 Regulation Maximum EIRP Country Code Maximum EIRP dBm 20 MHz Bandwidth 10 MHz Bandwidth 5 MHz Bandwidth Japan 4 9 GHz 34 34 NOTE 1 NA FCC 5 3 GHz 30 NOTE 3 27 NOTE 2 NA FCC 5 4 GHz 30 27 NA ETSI 5 4 GHz 30 27 NA ETSI F 5 4 GHz 30 27 NA Australia 5 4 GHz 30 27 NA Universal 5 4 GHz AU 38 AU 38 NA SU 49 SU 49 FCC 5 8 GHz AU 36 AU 36 NA SU No Limit PtMP SU No Limit PtMP UK 5 8 GHz 36 33 NA Australia 5 8 GHz 36 36 NA India 5 8 GHz 36 36 NA Germany 5 8 GHz 36 33 NA Universal 5 8 GHz AU 36 AU 36 NA SU No Limit PtMP SU No Limit PtMP Brazil 4 9 GHz 29 26 NA FCC 900 MHz NA NA 36 Australia 900 MHz NA NA 30
208. ies to associate and the AU does not respond because it does not hear the SU s packets M AU MAC Address SU only The MAC address of the AU with which the unit is currently associated If the unit is not associated with any AU the address defaults to the IEEE broadcast address which is FF FF FF FF FF FF E Unit Hardware Version The version of the outdoor unit hardware H Unit BOOT Version The version of the BOOT SW HM Time Since Last Reset BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O O 35 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters E Flash Versions Running from Shows whether the unit is running from the Main or from the Shadow Version Main Version File Name The name of the compressed file with a bz extension of the version currently defined as the main version Main Version Number The software version currently defined as the main version Shadow Version File Name The name of the compressed file with a bz extension of the version currently defined as the shadow backup version Shadow Version Number The software version currently defined as the shadow backup version Radio Band The radio band of the unit Log Out Timer The value of the Log Out Timer as defined in the Unit Control menu Country Code The 3 or 4 digits Country Code used by the unit and its general description Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode The Ethernet port negotiation mode as defined in the Unit Control
209. igured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 1 5 VLAN Relaying AU only The VLAN Relaying feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service Provider Links It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Relaying List If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service Provider Link and the VLAN Relaying Support option is enabled a frame relayed from the wireless link which is a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted back through the wireless link with a VLAN ID or a Service Provider VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Relaying List is discarded If VLAN Forwarding Support is also enabled it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options 4 2 6 4 1 5 1 VLAN Relaying Support The VLAN Relaying Support option enables or disables the VLAN Relaying feature Available selections are Disable and Enable The default selection is Disable 4 2 6 4 1 5 2 Add Relaying VLAN ID The Add Relaying VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN Relaying List One VLAN ID can be entered at a time The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying List is 20 Valid values are 1 to 4094 4 2 6
210. imple solution for managing the information rate in such cases can result in an unfair allocation of resources as subscribers with a higher CIR actually receive an IR lower than the CIR designated for subscribers in a lower CIR bracket A special algorithm for graceful degradation is incorporated into the AU ensuring that the degradation of performance for each individual Subscriber Unit is proportional to its CIR The MIR CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data To balance the performance over time a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable higher transmission rates after a period of inactivity If no data intended for a certain SU in the AU or for the AU in an SU is received from the Ethernet port during the last N seconds the unit is allowed to transmit to this destination N times its allowed IR value without any delay For example if the Burst Duration is set to 0 5 second or more then after a period of inactivity of 0 5 seconds up to 128 Kbits x 0 5 64 Kbits may be transmitted to a unit whose IR is 128 Kbps without any delay provided overall conditions in the wireless link allow this burst MIR Downlink SU only Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 23 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N
211. ing assembly is supplied with the IDU to ODU cable kit M Pole mounting kit for the ODU the kit for the new smaller size ODU is different from the kit for all other ODUSs BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 30 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 4 2 1 1 3 Chapter 2 Installation Installation Requirements MW An IDU to ODU cable kit including 20m Category 5E Ethernet cable with a shielded RJ 45 connector crimped on one end a waterproof sealing assembly and two shielded RJ 45 connectors not applicable for the new smaller size SU A ODU and SU E ODU Modular Base Station Equipment This section describes the items included in the installation packages for each Modular Base Station system component BS SH Base Station Chassis The BS SH installation kit includes the following components M BS SH chassis with blank panels M Rubber legs for optional desktop installation AU E BS Access Unit The AU E BS and installation kit includes the following components M BS AU Network Interface module HM AU ODU outdoor unit Table 2 2 Access Unit ODU Types AU ODU Type Description AU E ODU A rectangular enclosure 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 cm with a connection to an external antenna antenna and cable not included HW revision D or lower M Pole mounting kit for the AU ODU the kit for the new smaller size ODU is different from the kit for all other ODUs BS PS AC Power Supply
212. inition definition ETSI 5 4 5 8 Frequency Definition Submenu in AU The Frequency De inition submenu in AU includes the following parameters Sub Band Select This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more Sub Bands For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 The range depends on the number of Sub Bands supported by the country code The default selection is Sub Band 1 Frequency The Frequency parameter defines the transmit receive frequency when DFS is not enabled If DFS is enabled it sets the initial operational frequency upon starting the DFS mechanism for the first time The range depends on the selected Sub Band The default is the lowest frequency in the Sub Band NOTE 1 Japan 4 9 GHz 10 MHz Bandwidth BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 4 2 6 2 4 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters In BreezeACCESSVL units operating in the 4 9 GHz Japan band not B amp B point to point with a 10 MHz bandwidth the following rules must be met for full compliance with regulations I When operating at 4945 MHz the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a value above 11 dBm The Maximum Transmit Power of the SU should not be set to a value above 10 dBm 2 When operating at 5055 MHz the Transmit Power p
213. ion AU SU 0 7 15 31 63 127 255 15 No Window 511 1023 Maximum Contention AU SU 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 1023 No Window 1023 Maximum Modulation AU SU According to the Min Max The highest available Yes Level Modulation Level defined for value the Sub Band Multicast Modulation AU According to the Min Max The lowest available Yes Level Modulation Level defined for value the Sub Band Number of HW Retries AU SU 1 14 10 Yes BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Control Modulation AU SU W Basic Rate Basic Rate Yes Level M Modulation Level 1 Average SNR Memory AU SU 1 to 32 5 Yes Factor Burst Mode Option AU SU Mf Disable Enable No E Enable Burst Mode Time AU SU 1 to the value defined in the 5 milliseconds or the Yes Interval Sub Band for Maximum value of Maximum Burst Duration milliseconds Burst Duration defined for the Sub Band the lower of the two values Adaptive Modulation AU SU i Adaptive Modulation Adaptive No Algorithm In Use E Statistics Based Rate Modulation Control Adaptive Modulation AU SU Mf Disable Enable No Option M Enable Minimum Interval AU SU 1 3600 seconds 4 seconds Yes Between Adaptive Modulation Messages Adaptive Modulation AU SU i Normal Normal No Decision Threshold E High Packet Threshold To
214. iority if the port number is included in the specified ranges If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets then all packets whose destination port number is included is in the specified ranges will receive High priority The available options are RIP amp RTCP RTP Only The default is RTP amp RTCP M Add UDP Port Ranges This option enables adding UDP port ranges to the list of priority port numbers The list can include up to 64 ranges It is possible to add discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 M Delete UDP Port Ranges This option enables deleting UDP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers It is possible to delete discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 M Delete All UDP Port Ranges This option enables deleting all UDP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers HM Show UDP Port Ranges Select this option to view the current UDP RTP RTCP Prioritization option and the list of UDP Port Ranges TCP Port Ranges The TCP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority classifiers when the UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to
215. is private to define both the uploaded file put and the downloaded file get The file should be transferred in ASCII mode Use the extension cfg for a configuration file Appendix B File Download and Upload Using TFTP Use the extension cmr for the Operator Defaults file Use the extension fln for a Feature License file Use the extension cdf for a Counter Debug file Feature license files include multiple strings where each string is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address When uploading a feature license to multiple units each unit will accept only the parts that are applicable for itself Use the SNMP read community string the default is public to define the downloaded log file get The log file should be transferred in binary image mode i option Examples I To upload the configuration file using a DOS based TFTP Client to an SU whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 enter tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private cfg 2 To download the Operator Defaults file from the same unit enter tftp 206 25 63 65 get private cmr Suconf 3 To upload the Feature Upgrade file to the same unit enter tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private fln 4 To download the Counter Debug file from the same unit enter tftp 206 25 63 65 get private cdf Suconf 5 To download the Log file from the same unit enter tftp i 206 25 63 65 get public log Suconf INFORMATION The Configuration File mechanism is common to
216. is enabled the SU will scan the defined subset and the operating frequency bandwidth will be determined by the Best AU mechanism including the optional use of the Preferred AU feature Otherwise the SU will try to associate with the first AU it finds If no AU is found the SU will start another scanning cycle BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 121 4 2 6 2 3 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Avoiding Frequencies with Radar Activity In some regions it is important to ensure that wireless access equipment does not interfere with certain radar systems in the 5 GHz band If radar is being detected the wireless access network should move automatically to a frequency that does not interfere with the radar system The country dependent set of parameters includes also an indication whether DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection should be used The DFS algorithm is designed to detect and avoid operation in channels with radar activity If the current sub band does not support DFS then the DFS parameters configuration submenu is not available INFORMATION Radar detection parameters that are enforced by Country Code specific regulations are editable only by users with Administrator privileges When enabling a Country Code that requires particular DFS settings the unit automatically applies these settings Users with Installer privileges will be able to set a particular Country Code but they will not be abl
217. is is in addition to the previous options in the Network Management menu that enable defining updating and deleting discrete IP addresses The menu includes the following options Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges The Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables defining updating up to 10 IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled The default Network Management IP Address Range is 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 0 all 10 ranges A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address in the format lt start address gt to lt end address gt example 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 255 or a base address and a mask in the format lt base address gt mask lt mask gt example 192 168 1 1 mask 255 255 255 0 Delete Network Management IP Address Range The Delete Network Management IP Address Range option enables deleting IP address range entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges The Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables deleting all entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 157 4 2 6 3 7 4 2 6 3 7 1 4 2 6 3 7 2 4 2 6 3 7 3 4 2 6 3 7 4 4 2 6 3 7 5 4 2 6 3 8 4 2 6 4 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters SNMP Traps AU Only The
218. ith the most recent event displayed last first in first out Erase Event Log The Erase Event Log option enables clearing the event log Event Log Upload The Event Log Upload submenu enables the optional uploading of the event log file to a remote FTP server The Event Log Upload submenu includes the following options E FTP Event Log Upload Execute The FTP event Log Upload Execute executes the upload of the Event Log file according to the parameters defined below E Event Log Destination Directory The Event Log Destination Directory enables defining the destination directory for the Event Log File Valid values A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters To clear the field press The default is an empty string E Event Log File Name The Event Log File Name option enables defining the name of the event log file to be uploaded Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters The default is logfile log E FTP Server IP Address The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file The default is 10 0 0 253 E FTP Gateway IP Address The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address The default is 0 0 0 0 E FTP User Name The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx
219. its using a 20 MHz bandwidth I In units HW Revision B if you wish to include frequency channel 5270 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs should not be set to a value above 17 Antenna Gain If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters this frequency should not be used 2 In units with HW Revision C if you wish to include one or more of frequency channels 5270 5275 and 5330 MHz in the set of frequencies to be used then the Transmit Power parameter in the AU and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs should not be set to a value above 20 Antenna Gain If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters this frequency should not be used BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp GS Chapter 3 Commissioning Using the Optional Y cable New SU A E ODU 3 2 Using the Optional Y cable New SU A E ODU A special Y cable available from Alvarion enables to connect a portable PC directly to the IDU COM port of the SU A E ODU This enables the installer to perform the entire process of configuring basic parameters aligning the antenna and verifying proper operation of the unit right after completing the installation minimizing the number of times the installer must climb to the roof It also enables simpler configuration performance monitoring during various maintenance testing actions To IDU COM Connector C
220. ity port numbers The list can include up to 64 ranges It is possible to add discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 Delete TCP Port Ranges This option enables deleting TCP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers It is possible to delete discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 Delete All TCP Port Ranges This option enables deleting all TCP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers Show TCP Port Ranges Select this option to view the current TCP RTP RTCP Prioritization option and the list of TCP Port Ranges IP Range Prioritization The IP Range Prioritization menu allows prioritization based on the frame s source and or destination IP address Frames with matching IPs are allocated to the High Priority queue while the rest of the frames are allocated to the Low Priority queue IP Range Prioritization Option This submenu sets up the type of IP prioritization employed Disable The IP prioritization is disabled Source IP Prioritization Frames with matching source IP addresses will be allocated to the High Priority queue Destination IP Prioritization Frames with matching destination IP addresses
221. ive media The default is Near LOS 4 2 6 2 22 1 2Minimum Desired Performance This setting defines the minimum throughput that must be ensured when optimizing the achievable distance Not applicable when the Optimize Performance for Minimum Desired Distance optimization criterion is used The available range is from 500 to 6000 kbps The default is 3000 kbps 4 2 6 2 22 1 3 Minimum Desired Distance This setting defines the minimum achievable distance that must be reached when optimizing the throughput Not applicable when the Optimize Distance for Minimum Desired Performance optimization criterion is used The available range is from 500 to 54000 meters The default is 1400 meters 4 2 6 2 22 1 4Channel Selection Optimization Criteria This setting allows you to select the optimization mechanism that will be employed BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Ko 52 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters E O0 Optimize Performance for Minimum Desired Distance Ensures the best throughput while preserving the Minimum Desired Distance E 1 Optimize Distance for Minimum Desired Performance Ensures the best achievable distance while preserving the Minimum Desired Performance The default is Optimize Distance for Minimum Desired Performance 4 2 6 2 22 1 5Scanning Type This setting defines the output of the analysis process performed by the Interference Mitigation mechanism E 0 Clear Channel Selection
222. l names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty M The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein M Any changes or modifications of equipment including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for It could also void the user s authority to operate the equipment Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual is manufactured and warranted by third parties All such equipment must be installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or the manufacturers Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious damage and or bodily harm and or void the user s authority to operate the equipment and or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer BreezeACCESS VL System Manual T About this Manual About this Manual This manual describes the BreezeACCESSVL Broadband Wireless Access Syst
223. lays information regarding the Subscriber Units associated with the AU as well as bridging forwarding information When DRAP is supported it enables viewing details on the active Gateways in the sector The following options are available M Display Bridging and Association Info The Display Bridging and Association Info option displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations in the AU s Forwarding Database For stations behind an SU the SU s MAC address is also displayed SU Address BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Each MAC address entry is followed by a description which may include the following Et Ethernet An address learned from the Ethernet port Vp Virtual port An address of a node behind an associated SU For these addresses learned from the wireless port the address of the applicable SU is also displayed in parenthesis St Static An associated SU For these entries the following details are also displayed for each SU Unit Name SW version Unit Type Distance from the AU IP Address Wi2 IP Address as defined in the SU or 0 0 0 0 for none ESSID X An SU that is included in the Deny List Sp Special 3 addresses that are always present including The MAC address of the AU Alvarion s Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 01 The system treats this address as a Broadcast address The Ethernet Broad
224. led then by the end of the Channel Avoidance Period the unit will attempt returning to the original frequency provided these conditions are met The Channel Reuse Parameters submenu includes the following options E Channel Reuse Option Enabling disabling the Channel Reuse algorithm The default is Disable E Radar Activity Assessment Period The period in hours used for assessment of radar activity in the original channel The range is 1 to 12 hours The default is 5 hours E Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period The maximum number of radar detections in the original channel during the Radar Activity Assessment Period that is required for reaching a decision to try again the original channel The range is 1 to 10 radar detections The default is 5 radar detections DFS Detection Algorithm The DFS Detection Algorithm option is applicable only to units using a Universal Country Code in either the 5 4 GHz or the 5 8 GHz band Country Codes 1060 and 1064 enabling to select the DFS detection algorithm if DFS should be enabled The available options are ETSI and FCC The default is ETSI Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset When the Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset is enabled after the next reset all viable frequencies will be marked in the database as Radar Free including frequencies previously marked as either Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar In addition the unit will start operation using its default
225. led at the Base Station site provide all the functionality necessary to communicate with the Subscriber Units and to connect to the backbone of the Service Provider There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures M Modular Base Station Equipment HM Standalone Micro Cell Access Unit Modular Base Station Equipment The Base Station Equipment is based on the BS SH 3U chassis which is suitable for installation in 19 inch racks SAAS The chassis contains one or two Power Supply modules ET i De and has 8 slots that can accommodate BS AU Network De sunne nn Interface modules These slots can also accommodate Va z s 5 various combinations of other modules including Network Interface BS AU modules for Access Units operating in any of the bands supported by BreezeACCESSequipment using GFSK modulation including BreezeACCESSII BreezeACCESSMMDS BreezeACCESSXL and BreezeACCESSV It can also accommodate a BS GU GPS and Alarms module to support GPS based synchronization of BreezeACCESSsystems using Frequency Hopping radios Two different types of power supply modules are available for the BreezeACCESSVL modules The BS PS DC that is powered from a 48 VDC power source and the BS PS AC powered from the 110 240 VAC mains The optional use of two power supply modules ensures fail safe operation through power supply redundancy When the same chassis is used also for Access Unit modules belonging to other Bree
226. less Trap AU 1 100 30 No Threshold Maximum Number of AU AU BS AU SA 1 512 1 124 AU BS AU SA 512 Yes Associations if Data Encryption Option is En ypron SPUON IS AUS BS AUSSA enabled 25 AUS BS AUS SA 1 25 BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Algorithm Country Code in 5 4 5 8 GHz E ETSI E FCC Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Sub Band Select AU According to the Country 1 Yes Code Frequency AU According to the Sub Band The lowest Yes frequency in the Sub Band User Defined SU All frequencies in the All available Yes Frequency Subsets available Sub Bands frequencies in all available Sub Bands DFS Required by AU SU E No Dependent on Yes Regulations E Yes Country Code Frequency Subset AU According to the Sub Band A A Yes Definition in AU list of frequency indexes or A for all frequencies supported by the Sub Band Channel Check AU SU 1 3600 seconds 60 seconds Yes Time Channel Avoidance AU SU 1 60 minutes 30 minutes Yes Period SU Waiting Option AU E Disable Enable Yes E Enable Minimum Pulses to AU SU 1 100 4 for FCC Yes D K Sioa 8 for other ETSI Channel Reuse AU SU WE Disable Disable Yes Option E Enable Radar Activity AU SU 1 12 hours 5 hours Yes Assessment Period Maximum Number of AU SU 1 10 detections 5 detections Yes De
227. lifies the installation and maintenance of small size installations by easily enabling the change of settings or firmware upgrade for one unit or an entire sector at a time AlvariCRAFT allows accessing a wide array of monitoring and configuration options including Device Manager for the selected Unit Selected unit or a complete sector configuration modification Firmware upgrade for a single unit or an entire sector On line performance data monitoring Export of configuration details to a CSV file Support for Telnet cut through to the managed devices and http cut through to Gateways or Wi APs behind connected SUs 1 8 2 AlvariSTAR AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier Class network management system for Alvarion s Broadband Wireless Access products based Networks AlvariSTAR is designed for today s most advanced Service Provider network Operation Centers NOCs providing the network Operation Administration and Maintenance OA amp M staff and managers with all the network surveillance monitoring and configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network s OA amp M staff with a unified scalable and distributable network management system The AlvariSTAR system uses a distributed client server architecture which provides the service provider with a robust scalable and fully redundant network managemen
228. lity Indicator Display option displays continuously updated information regarding the average quality of the wireless link to the AU using the dynamically updated average modulation level measurements The Link Quality Indicator LQI calculation is performed using the formula LQI 0 9 x Previous LQI 0 1 x Last Successful Modulation Level Each successful transmit will be included in this average by using the modulation level in which the frame was successfully transmitted as the Last Successful Modulation Level In order to receive quick and reliable LQ measurements there should be sufficient traffic between the SU and the AU It is recommended to have traffic of at least 100 packets per second The traffic can be generated either by an external utility FTP session ping generator etc or by the Ping Test option in the Site Survey menu with the appropriate settings see section Ping Test on page 107 INFORMATION y If Limited Test is indicated next to the LQI results it means that the results may not indicate the true quality as not all modulation levels from 1 to 8 are available The limitation may be due to the HW of the unit HW Revision A or the applicable parameters in the country code or the configurable Maximum Modulation Level parameter 4 2 5 4 4 2 5 4 1 Click the Esc key to abort the test MAC Address Database MAC Address Database in AU The MAC Address Database option in the AU disp
229. ll it should be remotely configured with the proper parameters or upgraded When the SU is configured properly the Promiscuous Mode should be disabled The default is Disable INFORMATION Promiscuous Authentication is currently not available for SU L units SU L units cannot join an AU VL cell in Promiscuous Mode INFORMATION Do not leave the AU in the enabled Promiscuous Authentication mode for prolonged periods Use it only when absolutely necessary perform the required actions as quickly as possible and disable it The unit will return automatically to Promiscuous Authentication disabled mode after reset 4 2 6 8 Country Code Parameters 4 2 6 8 1 Country Code Select The Country Code Select option enables changing the Country Code used by the unit The default Country Code is set in factory according to the destination country CAUTION A The selected Country Code must comply with applicable local radio regulations 4 2 6 8 2 Re apply Country Code Values After loading a new SW version with any changes in the relevant Country Code the Re apply Country Code Values option must be activated for the changes to take effect Following activation of this feature the unit must be reset to fully apply the changes INFORMATION a Following activation of the Re apply Country Code Values option all parameters that are affected by the i Country Code frequency parameters transmit power parameters DFS operation modula
230. m The default depends on the Country Code No for Universal Country Codes in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz bands Yes for all other Country Codes that support DFS as required by applicable regulations 4 2 6 2 4 3 2 Frequency Subset Definition The Frequency Subset Definition parameter defines the frequencies that will be used in the DFS mechanism The available frequencies according to the Sub Band are displayed and each of the frequencies in the list is associated with an index The frequencies subset can be defined by entering the indexes of the required frequencies or A to select all available frequencies The default is the complete list of frequencies available in the Sub Band 4 2 6 2 4 3 3 Channel Check Time The Channel Check Time defines the time allocated for checking whether there is a radar activity on a new frequency after power up or after attempting to move to a new frequency upon detecting radar activity on the previously used frequency During this time the unit does not transmit The range is 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 60 seconds INFORMATION When ETSI country codes are applied on operating channels overlapping partially or totally with frequency range 5600 5650 MHz the Channel Check Time is forced to minimum 600 seconds 10 minutes 4 2 6 2 4 3 4 Channel Avoidance Period The Channel Avoidance Period defines the time that the frequency will remain marked in the database as Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar after
231. management filtering If management filtering is enabled the unit can only be managed by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in either the Network Management IP Addresses list or in the Network Management IP Address Ranges list described below and that are connected to the unit via the defined port s The following options are available M Disable No IP address based filtering is configured E Activate IP Filter on Ethernet Port Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The unit can be managed from the Ethernet port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the wireless port E Activate IP Filter on Wireless Link Port Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The unit can be managed from the wireless port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the Ethernet port E A
232. menu Ethernet Port State The actual state of the Ethernet port E FTP Parameters General FTP parameters common to SW Version Download Configuration File Upload Download and Event File Upload using FTP FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name FTP Password E FTP Software Download Parameters The parameters for SW download using FTP as defined in Unit Control menu FTP SW Version File Name FTP Source Directory M Configuration File Download Upload Parameters The parameters for Configuration file upload download using FTP as defined in the Unit Control menu Configuration File Name Configuration File Source Directory Operator Defaults File Name BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D Q 4 2 2 2 4 2 2 3 4 2 2 4 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters E FTP Log File Upload Parameters The parameters for Event Log file upload using FTP as defined in the Unit Control menu FTP Log File Name FTP Log File Destination Directory E Event Log Minimum Severity M ATE Test Status Indicates the result of the unit s final testing in production In units supplied with SW version 4 5 and higher should always be PASS In units upgraded from a version below 4 5 this parameter will be NONE M Serial Number The Serial Number of the unit Applicable only to units supplied with SW version 4 5 and higher In units upgraded from a version below 4 5
233. mpty string is not allowed The default is operator cmr M FTP Server IP Address The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file The default is 10 0 0 253 M FTP Gateway IP Address The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address The default is 0 0 0 0 E FTP User Name The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx M FTP Password The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx M Show Configuration File Upload Download Parameters Displays the current values of the Configuration File Upload Download parameters INFORMATION There is one set of general FTP parameters FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name and FTP Password This set or relevant parts of the set serves the SW Download procedure the Configuration File Upload Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures 4 2 3 13 LED Mode SU only The LED Mode submenu controls the SNR bar and LED indica
234. mum Modulation Level parameter may be performed remotely for example from the site of the AU or from another site gt To configure the Maximum Modulation Level I If the SNR of the SU at the AU is too low it is recommended that you configure the Maximum Modulation Level parameter to a value that is lower than the maximum supported by the unit This can decrease the number of retransmissions due to attempts to transmit at modulation levels that are too high for the actual quality of the link 2 Check the SNR of the SU at the AU You can use Telnet to view the SNR values in the MAC Address Database which can be accessed from the Site Survey menu If the ATPC algorithm is not enabled in both AU and SU the test should be done with the Initial Power Level at the SU configured to its maximum value If the SNR is lower than the values required for the maximum modulation level according to Table 3 3 it is recommended that you decrease the value of the Maximum Modulation Level INFORMATION The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the applicable SU If necessary use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data transmission 3 Configure the Maximum Modulation Level according to Table 3 3 using the typical SNR values It is recommended that a 2 dB margin be added to compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the quality of the link Table 3 3 Recommende
235. mum Tx Power parameter in the SUs should not be set to a value above 20 Antenna Gain If there is a need to use a higher value for these parameters this frequency should not be used DFS Parameters The DFS Parameters submenu is available only if DFS is supported by the current Sub Band Note that starting on SW version 5 2 the DFS feature is supported although disabled by default for units using Country Codes 1060 and 1064 Universal 5 4 GHz and Universal 5 8 GHz When a unit using either one of these Country Codes is upgraded from a SW version lower than 5 2 the feature will not be automatically applicable If the user wants to use the DFS feature he must re apply the Country Code values see section Re apply Country Code Values on page 206 Note also that for these units if the user changes the working sub band the DFS Option will be automatically set to No For other Country Codes that support DFS when sub band is changed the DFS Option is forced to Yes The DFS Parameters submenu includes the following parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 4 3 1 DFS Required by Regulations The DFS Required by Regulations option enables defining whether DFS should be used for compliance with applicable local regulations The options are Yes or No Selection of the No option will disable the radar detection and dynamic frequency selection mechanis
236. n Requirements Installation Requirements This section describes all the supplies required to install the BreezeACCESSVL system components and the items included in each installation package INFORMATION Installation requirements for SU I are provided in section Installing the SU I on page 48 2 1 1 Packing List 2 1 1 1 SU A E Subscriber Unit The SU AVE installation kit includes the following components E IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit M Mains power cord M Any of the following Outdoor Units Table 2 1 Subscriber Unit ODU Types SU ODU Type Description SU A ODU A rectangular enclosure plus a diamond shaped vertically polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel 41 5 x 36 9 x 6 3 cm HW revision D or lower New SU A ODU A diamond shaped enclosure 22 x 22 x 7 cm with a vertically horizontally polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel The smaller size new SU A ODU HW revision E is currently available only in the 5 4 GHz and 5 8 GHz bands SU E ODU A rectangular enclosure 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 cm with a connection to an external antenna antenna and cable not included HW revision D or lower New SU E ODU A diamond shaped enclosure 22 x 22 x 7 cm with a connection to an external antenna antenna and cable not included INFORMATION The SU A ODU and SU E ODU are supplied without the waterproof sealing assembly for the INDOOR pa connector The seal
237. n algorithm has no effect 4 2 6 5 10 4 1 Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages The Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages sets the minimum interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation messages carrying information on the SNR of received signals The messages in the AU include SNR information on all the SUs associated with it The available range is from 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 4 seconds 4 2 6 5 10 4 2 Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds 4 2 6 5 11 Enables selection between Normal and High decision thresholds for the Adaptive Modulation algorithm In links with a low SNR below 13 the Adaptive Modulation algorithm may not stabilize on the correct modulation level when using the standard decision thresholds In this case the algorithm may try to use a modulation level that is too high resulting in a relatively large number of dropped frames The High option solves this limitation and ensures good performance also in links with a low SNR The default is Normal Concatenation Parameters The Concatenation mechanism enables bundling several data frames into a single frame for transmission to the wireless link This feature improves throughput and reduces the overhead in the wireless medium by requiring only one CRC for each concatenated frame one RTS CTS cycle if applicable and a single waiting period according to the contention window mechanism before transmission When concatena
238. n these cases the Transmit Power cannot exceed the value of Maximum EIRP Antenna Gain E Maximum Tx Power parameter in SU only For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 The unit calculates the maximum allowed Transmit Power according to the unit properties and parameters listed above and displays the allowed range when a Transmit Power parameter is selected BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ea Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters For each modulation level the unit will use as transmit power the minimum between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW and the Country Code for the specific modulation level The default Transmit Power is the highest allowed value On VL 900 AUs with hardware revision G and VL 900 SUs with hardware revision F the transmit power cannot vary beyond certain thresholds For this purpose the maximum transmission power is limited by the unit s maximum modulation which sets the minimum transmission power level according to regulations Table 4 9 Maximum TX Power for VL 900 Units Maximum TX Power Per Modulation Modulation 7 3 F 5 j 8 19 dBm 20 dBm 22 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 7 20 dBm 22 dBm 24dBm 26 dBm 26 dBm 26 dBm 26 dBm 6 22
239. nate location BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 3 Commissioning Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna 5 Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station However in certain conditions such as when the line of site to the Base Station is hampered better reception may be achieved using a reflected signal In this case the antenna is not always directed toward the Base Station 6 Secure the unit firmly to the pole SU A ODU or the antenna connected to SU E ODU fasten the rotation screws SU I antenna INFORMATION In some cases the antenna may need to be tilted to ensure that the level at which the SU receives Z transmissions from the AU and vice versa is not too high As a rule of thumb if the SU is located at a distance of less than 300 meters from the AU it is recommended to up tilt the antenna by approximately 10 to 15 To guarantee a safety margin from the saturation level the SNR should not be higher than 50 dB The orange LED of the SNR bar indicates that the SNR is higher than 50 dB BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp eo eo Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level 3 4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level This section describes how to configure the maximum modulation level for Subscriber Units INFORMATION If the unit is associated with the AU then the final configuration of the Maxi
240. nd noise floor level in order to meet particular requirements regarding throughput and distance The unit will scan and analyze the 900 MHz spectrum and depending on the detected noise levels it will choose an optimal operating channel and noise floor level There are two types of optimization mechanisms available The unit can either find settings that will ensure the best range for a given throughput or settings that will ensure the best throughput for a given range Based on the sector s topography the unit estimates a theoretical link budget and matches it against the noise levels detected during the scan to identify the settings that best meet the user s requirements The Interference Mitigation offers a quick and efficient mechanism for setting up access units in the noisy environment of the 900 MHz band when the operator doesn t have the time or the expertise required for a full spectrum analysis and channel optimization For optimal results however a thorough radio planning performed by a radio specialist is always recommended CAUTION Upon activating the Interference Mitigation the unit will automatically reset The unit will enter passive A scanning mode for a definite period of time during which information will be gathered During the information gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data Also it will not be able to synchronize associate meaning that it cannot be managed via the wireless link At the end of th
241. nd not the ESSID of the AU as it is when Hidden ESSID is disabled The ESSID related parameters are 4 2 6 2 2 1 ESSID The ESSID parameter defines the ESSID of the unit Valid values A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters The default value is ESSID1 INFORMATION j The ESSID string is case sensitive 4 2 6 2 2 2 Operator ESSID Parameters AU only The Operator ESSID Parameters submenu includes the following parameters 4 2 6 2 2 2 1 Operator ESSID Option The Operator ESSID Option enables or disables the use of Operator ESSID for establishing association with SUS The default is Enable 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 Operator ESSID The Operator ESSID parameter defines the Operator ESSID Valid values A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters The default value is ESSID1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 120 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION The Operator ESSID string is case sensitive 4 2 6 2 2 3 Hidden ESSID Option AU only The Hidden ESSID Option enables or disables the Hidden ESSID feature When enabled the ESSID will not be broadcasted by the AU The default is Disable 4 2 6 2 2 4 Hidden ESSID SU only The Hidden ESSID submenu in the SU includes the following options 4 2 6 2 2 4 1 Hidden ESSID Support The Hidden ESSID Support option enables or disables the Hidden ESSID feature in the SU The default is Disable 4 2 6 2 2 4 2 Hidden ESSID Timeout The
242. nd relevant products SW Version 5 1 April 2008 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Sections 1 2 1 8 1 1 9 5 3 1 9 SA ANLA S detached antenna are no longer available Only AU E models are available antennas are sold separately Topic Description Version Date Issued Protecting ODU Connections New SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Section 2 3 3 MAC Address Database in AU In Display Association Info RSSI SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Section 4 2 5 4 1 info has been added per SU Continuous Noise Floor Display New feature SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Sections 4 2 5 3 2 SU 4 2 5 5 AU Continuous Average SNR RSSI Average RSSI has been added to SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Display in SU the display Added formula used Section 4 2 5 3 1 for calculations Spectrum Analysis Information Added new parameters OFDM SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Display SNR OFDM Max SNR Noise Section 4 2 6 2 14 6 Floor Avg Noise Floor Max Show Spectrum Analysis Updated manual SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Parameters amp Data Section 4 2 6 2 14 8 Show Best AU Parameters and RSSI of the received signal has SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Data been added Section 4 2 6 2 6 4 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Added default value for 0 9 SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Level GHz band Section 4 2 6 2 8 3 4 MIR CIR ranges and defaults Added values for SU 8 SW Version 5 1 April 2008 Table 4 23 Ta
243. ndoor unit to the user s equipment and the Indoor to Outdoor cable should not exceed 100 meters E Reset the unit using the RESET button after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor units with the indoor to outdoor cable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 3 Commissioning In This Chapter Configuring Basic Parameters on page 65 Using the Optional Y cable New SU A E ODU on page 70 Oo Oo M Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna on page 71 M Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level on page 73 Operation Verification on page 75 INFORMATION y Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this chapter does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual 3 1 3 1 1 Chapter 3 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters Configuring Basic Parameters Initial Configuration After completing the installation process as described in the preceding chapter the basic parameters
244. nfigurable number of time slots Under regular conditions AIFS is configured to two time slots To support prioritization in the wireless link we can configure a higher AIFS for low priority traffic AIFS of two time slots will always be used for high priority traffic as well as AU s transmissions of broadcasts multicasts and beacons This will give advantage to units that need to transmit high priority traffic depending also on the configured values for the Contention Window parameters Other parameters related to transmission to the wireless media that can be configured separately for high low priority packets are the Number of HW Retries and Burst Duration Typically a lower value of Number of HW Retries should be configured for traffic such as VoIP which on the one hand is sensitive to delays and on the other hand is less sensitive to missing packets than data traffic The Burst Duration which defines the maximum duration of a burst should be set to a lower value for delay sensitive traffic Typically the Burst Duration of the AU should be set to higher value than that of the SUs because of the higher number of packets that should be transmitted by the AU When the Wireless Link Prioritization feature is enabled the following parameters are not applicable Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS Number of HW Retries Burst Mode Option Burst Mode Time Interval Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent When an SU with a SW version b
245. ng cells or for compliance with local regulatory requirements In some cases the maximum transmit power of the SU should be limited to ensure compliance with applicable regulations or for other reasons Different power levels may be used for different modulation levels by taking into account possible HW limitations or regulatory restrictions Transmit Power The Transmit Power submenu includes the following options E Transmit Power E Show Transmit Power Parameters Transmit Power In the AU the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level and is not part of the ATPC algorithm In the SU the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level when the ATPC algorithm is disabled If the ATPC Option is enabled the value configured for this parameter serves for setting the initial value to be used by the ATPC algorithm after either power up or losing synchronization with the AU The minimum value for the Transmit Power Parameter is 10 dBm the ATPC may reduce the actual transmit power of the SU to lower values The maximum value of the Transmit Power Parameter depends on several unit properties and parameters M The HW revision of the unit M The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub Band M The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub Band together with the value of the Antenna Gain In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some equipment types cannot exceed a certain value I
246. ng preceded with RTS frames Setting this parameter to a value larger than the maximum frame size eliminates the RTS CTS handshake for frames transmitted by this unit The available values range from 20 to 4092 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher and 20 to 2200 for units with HW revision A or B The default value for SUs is 60 bytes BreezeACCESS VL System Manual es 4 2 6 5 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters For AUs with HW revision C or higher the default is 4092 and for AUs with HW revision A or B the default is 2200 It is recommended that these values be used to ensure that RTS CTS is never used in the AU Minimum Contention Window The Minimum Contention Window parameter determines the time that a unit waits from the time it has concluded that there are no detectable transmissions by other units until it attempts to transmit The BreezeACCESSVL system uses a special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal and analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate the activity of other SUs served by the AU The target is to minimize collisions in the wireless medium resulting from attempts of more than one unit to transmit at the same time The system uses an exponential Back off algorithm to resolve contention between several units that want to access the wireless medium The method requires each station to choose a random number N between
247. nimum SNR Level defines the lowest SNR at which you want each SU to be received at the AU the lower limit of the optimal reception level range Available values 4 to 60 dB Default value 28 dB BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O 4 2 6 2 8 3 4 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level The Delta from Minimum SNR Level is used to define the highest SNR at which you want each SU to be received at the AU the higher limit of the optimal reception level range Max Level Minimum SNR Level Delta from Minimum SNR Level Available values 4 to 20 dB Default value 5 dB for units operating in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz bands 8 dB for units operating in the 4 9 5 2 and 5 3 GHz bands 4 2 6 2 8 3 5 Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages The Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages parameter sets the minimal time between consecutive power up power down messages to a specific SU Setting a low value for this parameter may lead to higher overhead and to an excessive rate of power level changes at the SUs High values for this parameter increase the time it will take the SUs to reach optimal transmit power level Available values 1 to 3600 seconds Default value 30 seconds 4 2 6 2 8 3 6 ATPC Power Level Step The ATPC Power Level Step parameter defines the step size to be used by the SUs for incrementing decrementing the Current Transmit Power after receiving a power up pow
248. nit and an AU ODU outdoor unit connected to a detached antenna IDU PS1073 Plastic box black desktop or wall 14x6 6 x 3 5 0 3 mountable AU E ODU Pole or wall mountable 30 5x 11 7 x 5 7 1 8 AU Ant 5G 16 60 2 3 5 pole mountable 43 6x25x 1 0 2 2 AU Ant 5G 17 90 2 3 5 pole mountable 55x25x 1 1 1 5 AU Ant 5G 15 120 2 3 5 pole mountable 53 x 26x 1 1 2 5 AU Ant 5 4G 8 Omni 2 5 4 5 pole mountable 70 cm high 6 cm 1 5 base diameter AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni Surface or pole mountable 40 cm high 3 2 cm 0 23 base diameter AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 2 4 pole mountable 55x25x 1 7 1 5 AU Ant 4 9G 9 Omni 1 5 3 pole mountable 46 cm high 5 5cm 0 6 base diameter AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK 1 4 pole mountable 55x7 5x5 1 AU Ant 0 9G V H 10 90 1 75 4 pole mountable up to 122 x 34 3 x 20 3 15 4 15 o mechanical tilt AU Ant 0 9G 7 Omni Pole mountable 244 cm high 3 3 1 8 cm base diameter BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description Specifications 1 9 5 4 2 Connectors Table 1 24 Connectors Stand Alone Access Unit Unit Connector Description IDU ETHERNET 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable connection to a PC crossed Cable connection to a hub straight RADIO 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 AC IN 3 PIN AC power plug AU ODU INDOOR 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected Antenna RF N Type jack on a 1 5m cable in the Omni 8 5 8
249. nk mode Valid values range from 1 to 4094 4 2 6 4 1 11 Show VLAN Parameters The Show VLAN Parameters option displays the current values of the VLAN support parameters 4 2 6 4 2 Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU only The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu enables defining the layer 2 Ethernet broadcast and multicast filtering capabilities for the selected SU Filtering the Ethernet broadcasts enhances the security of the system and saves bandwidth on the wireless medium by blocking protocols that are typically used in the customer s LAN but are not relevant for other customers such as NetBios which is used by the Microsoft Network Neighborhood Enabling this feature blocks Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts by setting the I G bit at the destination address to 1 This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind the SU The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu includes the following parameters E Filter Options M DHCP Broadcast Override Filter M PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter M ARP Broadcast Override Filter 4 2 6 4 2 1 Filter Options The Filter Options enables defining the Ethernet Broadcast filtering functionality of the unit Select from the following options M Disable no Ethernet Broadcast Filtering E On Ethernet Port Only filters broadcast messages received from the Ethernet port HM On Wireless Port Only filters broadcast messages received from the wireless link port E On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports filt
250. nnectors are as listed in the following table Appendix D Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable Table D 1 Cable Color Codes Wire color Pin Blue 1 Blue white Orange Orange white Brown Brown white Green O NI om AJ OD WwW N Green white Use a crimp tool for RJ 45 connectors to prepare the wires insert them into the appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector Make sure to do the following I Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket Verify that the external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing 2 Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ 45 connector to ensure a good connection with the connector s shield after crimping BreezeACCESS System Manual amp es D Appendix E Parameters Summary In This Appendix The tables provide an at a glance summary of the configurable parameters value ranges and default values In addition each parameter entry also includes an indication as to whether the parameter is updated in run time or whether the unit must be reset before the modification takes effect No in the Run Time column indicates that a change to the parameter will take effect only after reset INFORMATION q Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use diffe
251. nnel MH OFDM Max SNR The maximum SNR in dB of OFDM frames received in the channel M Noise Floor Avg The average Noise Floor in dBm calculated for the channel M Noise Floor Max The maximum Noise Floor in dBm calculated for the channel Spectrum Analysis Information Display Continuous The Spectrum Analysis Information Display Continuous option is available only when the analysis process is active It enables viewing the continuously updated results of the current analysis process The BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp es 145 4 2 6 2 14 8 4 2 6 2 15 4 2 6 2 16 4 2 6 2 17 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters displayed information includes the same details available for a regular Spectrum Analysis Information Display option Show Spectrum analysis Parameters amp Data The Show Spectrum analysis Parameters amp Data option enables viewing the Spectrum analysis test parameters and the last test results Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold AU only When it is unable to send beacon frames for a predetermined period of time such as in the case of interferences the AU resets itself The Lost Beacons Transmission Threshold parameter represents the number of consecutive lost beacons after which the unit will reset itself The range for this parameter is 100 1000 or 0 When the parameter is set to 0 this feature is disabled i e internal refresh will never be performed
252. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenenenenennnnnnnnenenenene 229 ELLE Security Parameters sssrini eaa aa a aAa Eee 232 Appendix F lt Troubleshooting sessccccccacisscsstantscasnscssettoecesediorientedsevecbesenstesnsesansaenes 233 F 1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems a xxunnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnn 233 F 2 SU Association Problems aaannvnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnvvnnnnvvnnnnvvnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnmennnn 234 F 3 Low Throughput Problems vav44sossesospsoressesrensseruedeie 234 BreezeACCESS System Manual e ov Figures Figures Figure 1 1 SU A ODU and IDU ve e 8 Figure 1 2 New SU A ODU RE EE 8 Figure 1 3 DG Power MJEctOT cireni A E Ea 11 Figure 1 4 DC Power Injector CE ssa saactcnucuateiadeanin araors p iaa aiaa aaaea kE rrai ainaani 11 Figure 2 1 Threaded Holes GrooveS vccscscesnesstiveriiaiiveiaensierivetienidendsetersiienientienweiiietiniedietinds 36 Figure 2 2 3 Pole Installation Using Special Clamps unnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 36 Figure 2 3 Back View of the new SU A ODU rnavrennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 37 Figure 2 4 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Vertical Polarization 38 Figure 2 5 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Horizontal Polarization 39 Figure 2 6 New ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory Vertical Polarization
253. nt Port Internal Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Access Tagged frames matching VID M Untagged Trunk or Hybrid frames when VID M 65535 Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Service Tagged frames matching VID M Provider Receive from Wireless when Link Type is Access Tagged frames matching VID M Untagged Trunk or Hybrid frames when VID M 65535 Receive from wireless when Link Type is Service Tagged frames matching VID M Provider Transmit Insert VID M PID M Table Legend E VID M VLAN ID Management HM PID M VLAN Priority Management VLAN Link Type The VLAN Link Type parameter enables defining the functionality of the VLAN aware capability of the unit The available options are Hybrid Link Trunk Link Access Link and Service Provider Link Access Link option is available only in SUs The default selection is Hybrid Link Access Link SU only Access Link transfers frames while tagging untagging them since all devices connected to the unit are VLAN unaware Thus the unit cannot transfer tagged frames Table 4 11 summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Access link BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp es Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 11 VLAN Data Port Functionality Access Link Action Data Port SU Receive from Ethernet Untagged frames Accept from Wireless Tagged frames matching VID D Tag Insert VID D PID D
254. o be included in the VLAN Forwarding List If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link a Service Provider Link or an Extended Trunk Link SU only and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled a data frame received with a VLAN ID or a Service Provider VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Forwarding List is discarded The VLAN Forwarding submenu provides the following options 4 2 6 4 1 4 1 VLAN Forwarding Support The VLAN Forwarding Support option enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding feature Available selections are Disable and Enable The default selection is Disable 4 2 6 4 1 4 2 Add Forwarding VLAN ID The Add Forwarding VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN Forwarding List One VLAN ID can be entered at a time The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20 Valid values are 1 to 4094 4 2 6 4 1 4 3 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID The Remove Forwarding VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Forwarding List Valid values are VID values from 1 to 4094 that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List 4 2 6 4 1 4 4 Show VLAN ID Forwarding List The Show VLAN Forwarding List option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in the VLAN Forwarding List INFORMATION If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is set to Enable then all data frames are discarded If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled then all VLAN IDs conf
255. o respond to certain frames that typically are transmitted by the AU every 10 seconds Since the sampling interval for this state is about 10 minutes it means that the decision to remove the SU from the Associations Database will take place between 6 to 16 minutes from the time the SU ceased sending data or responding to these keep alive frames for AUS the sampling interval is 1 minute meaning decision time of 6 to 7 minutes E Number of Associations Since Last Reset For SUs displays the total number of associations with any AU since the last reset including duplicate associations with the same AU For AUs displays the number of SUs that have associated with the AU since the last reset including duplicate associations with the same SU HM Number of Rejections since Last Reset Applicable only for AU when the Hidden ESSID feature is enabled Displays the number of times that any unit attempting to associate with the AU was rejected because of a non matching ESSID including multiple rejections of the same unit M Unit Status SU only The current status of the SU There are three status options SCANNING The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate If DFS is enabled and the SU is currently looking for its previous AU the AU s MAC Address will be displayed ASSOCIATED The SU is associated with an AU AUTHENTICATING This is typically a temporary status For example when an SU hears the beacons of an AU tr
256. of various parameter sets The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in the configuration menus You can view a specific parameter set or choose to view all parameters at once While this menu is available at all access levels some security related parameters including the encryption Keys ESSID and Operator ESSID are only displayed to users with Administrator access rights The Info Screens menu includes the following options Show Unit Status Show Basic Configuration Show Advanced Configuration Show Country Dependent Parameters Show All Parameters Show Unit Status The Show Unit Status menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of the following parameters HM Unit Name As defined in the Unit Control menu BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp 84 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Unit Type Identifies the unit s function M Unit MAC Address The unit s unique IEEE MAC address M Current Number of Associations AU only The total number of SUs associated with this AU This number may include units that are not currently active or associated INFORMATION An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions M The SU failed to respond to 100 consecutive data frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out M During the last 6 minutes or more the SU did not transmit any data frame and failed t
257. on MAC addresses E srclp The rule will be applied on frames with matching source IP addresses E dstlp The rule will be applied on frames with matching destination IP address M srcUdpPort The rule will be applied on UDP frames with matching source UDP ports E dstUdpPort The rule will be applied on UDP frames with matching destination UDP ports E srcTcpPort The rule will be applied on TCP frames with matching source TCP ports E dstTcpPort The rule will be applied on TCP frames with matching destination TCP ports E IpProtocol The rule will be applied on frames with matching IP protocols M default This rule will be applied on frames that don t match any of the remaining rules By default each rule is populated with the noRule setting When a frame matches multiple rule types the rule type that is highest in the list above except for the noRule type will have precedence and any other matching rule will be ignored For instance a srcMac rule will have precedence over a dstMac rule which in turn will have precedence over a srclp rule etc If there are multiple rules of the same type the lower the rule number the higher the precedence For instance Rule 1 will have precedence over Rule 2 which will have precedence over Rule 3 if rules 1 2 and 3 have the same type BreezeACCESS VL System Manual a Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 17
258. on 4 0 July 2006 DRAP support Section 4 2 6 6 4 New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Gateways Table Section 4 2 5 4 1 New display of existing gateways when DRAP is enabled SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Wireless Link Prioritization Section 4 2 6 6 3 6 New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 FTP Client IP Address Sections 4 2 3 11 4 2 3 12 Changed functionality read only set to unit s IP Address SW Version 4 0 July 2006 FTP Server IP Address Sections 4 2 3 11 4 2 3 12 4 2 39 4 Changed default to 10 0 0 253 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued Number of HW Retries Section 4 2 6 5 8 Maximum value was changed from 15 to 14 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Ethernet packet length Section 4 2 5 1 1 Updated maximum length SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Basic Parameters Table Table 3 1 Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Parameters that are not reset to default value after Set Complete Factory Operator Defaults Table 4 2 Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Parameters that are not reset to default value after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults Table 4 3 Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters SW V
259. onality W LINK O Wireless Link M Green Unit is associated with one or more SUs Indicator E Blinking red No associations E Off Wireless link is disabled Status hs self test and M Green Power is available and self test passed C _ power indication E Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation M Red Self test failed fatal error ETH O E Ethernet activity E Green Ethernet link detected connectivity E Amber No Ethernet connectivity between the indication indoor and outdoor units Table 3 5 SU ODU LEDs Name Description Functionality W LINK gt Wireless Link Green Unit is associated with an AU no Ser Indicator wireless link activity E Blinking Green Data received or transmitted on the wireless link Blinking rate is proportional to wireless traffic rate E Off Wireless link is disabled BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D e 3 5 2 Chapter 3 Commissioning Operation Verification Table 3 5 SU ODU LEDs Continued Name Description Functionality Status Self test and M Green Power is available and self test passed D power indicator E Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation E Red Self test failed fatal error ETH PT FR Ethernet activity E Green Ethernet link between the indoor and f Ei connectivity outdoor units is detected no activity 7 indicator E Blinking Green Ethernet connectivity is OK with traffic on the port
260. onds DRAP Support AU E Disable Enable No E Enable UDP Port AU 8000 8200 8171 No Maximum Number Of AU 1 255 40 No Voice Calls DRAP TTL AU 1 255 seconds 10 seconds No Proportional IR Factor SU 0 100 0 Yes BreezeACCESS System Manual O D 231 Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Proportional IR Update SU 1 30 minutes 5 minutes Yes Period Proportional IR SU 1 100 20 Yes Threshold Percentage Proportional IR SU 1 8 5 Yes Threshold Rate Security Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Authentication AU SU HI Open system Open system No Algorithm E Shared Key Data Encryption AU SU Disable Disable No Option E Enable Security Mode AU SU Hi WEP WEP No E AES OCB E FIPS 197 Default Key SU 1 4 1 No Default Multicast Key AU 1 4 1 No Key 1 to Key 4 AU SU 32 hexadecimal digits 0 0 all 0 no key No Promiscuous AU E Disable Disable Yes Authentication E Enable Disable after reset BreezeACCESS System Manual Applicable only if supported by the Sub Band Appendix F Troubleshoot Ing INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this appendix
261. onfiguration menu The Advanced Configuration menu enables accessing the following menus HM P Parameters E Air Interface Parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 16 4 2 6 1 4 2 6 1 1 4 2 6 1 2 4 2 6 1 3 4 2 6 1 4 4 2 6 1 4 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Network Management Parameters Bridge Parameters Performance Parameters Service Parameters Security Parameters IP Parameters The IP Parameters menu enables defining IP parameters for the selected unit and determining its method of IP parameter acquisition The IP Parameters menu includes the following options E IP Address E Subnet Mask M Default Gateway Address E DHCP Client IP Address The IP Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit The default IP address is 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask parameter defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the unit The default mask is 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway Address The Default Gateway Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit s default gateway The default value for the default gateway address is 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client The DHCP Client submenu includes parameters that define the method of IP parameters acquisition The DHCP Client submenu includes the following options HM DHCP Option M Access to DHCP DHCP Option The DHCP Option displays the current status of the DHCP support and allows selecting a new opera
262. op or wall mountable 14x 6 6 x 3 5 0 3 SU A ODU Metal box plus an integral cut diamond shaped 41 5x36 9x6 3 2 3 antenna in a plastic enclosure pole or wall mountable New SU A ODU Diamond shaped metal box plus an integral antenna 22 x 22 x7 1 3 5 4 5 8 GHz in a plastic enclosure pole or wall mountable SU E ODU Metal box pole or wall mountable 30 5x11 7x5 7 1 8 New SU E ODU Diamond shaped metal box plus a plastic enclosure 22 x 22 x7 1 3 0 9 GHz pole or wall mountable SU Ant 0 9G 10 Pole mountable elevation adjustable 30 5x30 5x2 5 1 3 1 9 5 1 2 Connectors Table 1 13 Connectors SU A E Subscriber Unit Unit Connector Description IDU ETHERNET 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable connection to a PC crossed Cable connection to a hub straight RADIO 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 AC IN 3 pin AC power plug SU A ODU INDOOR 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Table 1 13 Connectors SU A E Subscriber Unit Continued Unit Connector Description GHz New SU A ODU 5 4 5 8 IDU COM 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a sealing cap SU E ODU INDOOR 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected Table 1 14 Ethernet Pin Out Assignments Radio Power
263. option defines weather the AU will choose the best noise free channel upon startup after completion of the spectrum analysis process The selection is per analysis when the analysis is completed it will be disabled automatically The default is Disable Spectrum Analysis Activation The Spectrum analysis Activation option enables activation of the spectrum analysis process Upon activation the unit will reset automatically and start up in spectrum analysis mode Reset Spectrum Analysis Information The Reset Spectrum Analysis Information option enables resetting the spectrum analysis counters Spectrum Analysis Information Display The Spectrum Analysis Information Display option enables viewing the results of the last analysis process The displayed information includes the following details for each channel E Frequency in MHz E Signal Count The number of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel M Signal SNR The average SNR of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel E Signal Max SNR The maximum SNR of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel M Signal Width The average width in microseconds of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel HM OFDM Frames The number of OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth detected in the channel HM OFDM SNR The average SNR in dB of OFDM frames received in the cha
264. ort The RADIO port supplies DC power to the ODU A and this may harm other equipment connected to it me gt To install the IDU I Connect the Indoor to Outdoor cable to the RADIO connector located on the front panel of the indoor unit 2 Connect the power cord to the unit s AC socket located on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains The unit can operate with AC mains of 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz INFORMATION The color codes of the power cable are as follows Brown Phase Blue Neutral 0 Yellow Green Ground 3 Verify that the POWER LED is lit indicating that power is supplied to the unit 4 Configure the basic parameters as described in Configuring Basic Parameters on page 65 5 Connect the 10 100 BaseT ETHERNET connector to the network The cable connection should be a straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a hub switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network Interface Card NIC BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Q Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit INFORMATION The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user s equipment together with the length of the Indoor to Outdoor cable should not exceed 100 meters I 2 4 1 RESET Button Functionality Using a sharp object press the recessed RESET button for a short time to reset the unit and reboot from the Main version
265. ort Ranges Prioritization Option defines whether port ranges based prioritization is enabled or disabled The following options are available M Disable M Enable Only for UDP M Enable Only for TCP M Enable for both UDP and TCP The default is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Ko a 4 2 6 6 3 3 2 4 2 6 6 3 3 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters UDP Port Ranges The UDP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority classifiers when the UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either Enable Only for UDP or Enable for both UDP and TCP All packets whose destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue All other packets will be routed to the Low queue unless they were assigned a High priority by another classifier The UDP Port Ranges menu includes the following options HM UDP RTP RTCP Prioritization Voice over IP is transported using Real Time Protocol RTP The Real Time Control Protocol RTCP is used to control the RTP When an application uses RTP RTCP it chooses for destination ports consecutive numbers RTP port is always an even number and the port with the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets then all the packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High pr
266. performed belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded unless the unit is behind a router If the unit is behind a router verify that the unit is configured with the correct Default Gateway Address 3 To view the current IP parameters of the unit use the Monitor program by connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet To access the IP parameters via the Monitor program a From the Main Menu select 1 Info Screens Appendix A Software Version Loading Using TFTP b From the Info Screen menu select 2 Show Basic Configuration The current basic configuration is displayed including the run time values for the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters 4 To modify any of the IP parameters a From the Main Menu select 3 Basic Configuration b To configure the IP address select 1 IP Address C To configure the subnet mask select 2 Subnet Mask d To configure the default gateway address select 3 Default Gateway Address e Reset the unit to apply the new IP parameters 5 To verify the connection PING the unit s IP address and verify that PING replies are being received 6 Use the TFTP utility with the following syntax to perform the upgrade tftp i hostaddress put sourcefile destinationfile where i is for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded put causes the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress 7 The original sourcefile name of
267. queue regardless of the priority configuration The Wireless Link Counters include the following statistics M Total transmitted frames to wireless The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames including control and wireless management frames In the AU there are also separate counters for the following Beacons AU only Management and Other Data frames including successfully transmitted unicast frames and multicast broadcast data frames excluding retransmissions excluding Beacons in AU M Total Transmitted Unicasts AU only The number of unicast frames successfully transmitted to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions This count is useful for calculating the rates of retransmissions or dropped frames as only unicast frames are retransmitted if not acknowledged E Total submitted frames bridge The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium The count does not include control and wireless management frames or retransmissions There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed High Mid and Low E Frames dropped too many retries The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum
268. r Unit INFORMATION There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the grooves pointing outward as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to the unit I 2 3 2 Pole Mounting the New ODU The new ODU can be mounted on a 1 to 4 pole using one of the following options M A pole mounting kit is supplied with each unit The kit includes a special clamp and a pair of threaded rods flat washers spring washers and nuts There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit enabling to use the mounting kit for installing the unit using either vertical or horizontal polarization The clamp enables installing the unit on diverse pole diameters from 1 to 4 M A Tilt Pole Mounting kit providing a tilt range of 15 is available from Alvarion The Tilt kit can be attached to the ODU and be mounted on a 1 to 4 pole using two 9 16 wide metal bands The following sections describe the installation of the SU A ODU Installation of the SU E ODU is similar with the exception that it does not include an integral antenna and the polarization issue is not relevant 2 3 2 1 Polarization The new SU A ODU can be pole mounted to provide either vertical or horizontal polarization Polarization Grounding screw Figure 2 3 Back View of the new SU A ODU The Polarization Arrow on the back of the unit indicates the type of polarization M For vertical pol
269. r chance to gain access to limited wireless link resources Typically AIFS should be configured to two time slots A value of 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual B ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters should only be used in one of the two units in a point to point link where in the other unit the AIFS remains configured to two time slots This ensures that the unit with AIFS configured to one has an advantage over the other unit provided that the Minimum Contention Window section Minimum Contention Window on page 178 parameter in both units is configured to 0 to disable the contention window back off algorithm INFORMATION The AIFS parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled The available range is from 1 to 50 time slots The default is 2 time slots CAUTION A An AIFS value of 1 should only be used in point to point applications when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is disabled Otherwise the default value of 2 must always be used In a point to point link only one unit should be configured to an AIFS value of 1 When both units need to transmit the unit with an AIFS value of 1 will have an advantage over the unit with AIFS of 2 In this case the Minimum Contention Window parameter in both units must be configured to 0 to disable the contention window back off algorithm 4 2 6 2 12 Maximum Number of Associations AU only
270. r detection mechanism supports Staggered PRF detection in the 5600 5650MHz band only and maintains legacy detection sensitivity present in previous SW versions up to 5 5 12 Table 4 8 Enhanced ETSI Radar Detection Behavior Enhanced ETSI Radar Detection On Off Enhanced ETSI Radar Detection full 5 4GHz band 5600 5650MHz Staggered PRF minimum pulses to A number of Staggered PRF signal groups equal to the detect maximum between Minimum Pulses to Detect 2 and 4 4 2 6 2 4 3 13 Show DFS Settings And Data Upon selecting the Show DFS Settings and Data the values of all DFS parameters and the current operating frequency will be displayed The current defined frequency subset as well as the defined subset to be used after the next reset are also displayed In addition all the applicable frequencies will be displayed together with their status in the database Radar Free Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar 4 2 6 2 4 4 Country Code Learning by SU This feature support simplified installation and updates processes by enabling the SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ga Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response message Upon synchronization the SU will check if its country code and the country code received from the AU are the same If they are not the same and the Country
271. r during A rain It is strongly recommended to mount the antenna on the wall using the supplied brackets BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I NL GE Ej fet By Ei pi pi iid i i ad By aa tn ak F j i l f Figure 2 17 Window Mounting the Antenna 2 5 5 4 Window Mount with Rotation Capability The installation kit includes the following 4 PHK40 16PT screws 1 2 M4 washers 2 2 rotation bars 3 and 2 suction cups 4 I Attach the rotation bars to the antenna and the suction cups to the rotation bars Refer to Figure 2 18 for directions 2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass Attach it to the window by pressing the suction cups onto the glass 3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the antenna Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna Do not over tighten Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ea eo Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I 4 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing the direction of the Base Station Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure the antenna is aimed correctly CAUTION The suction cups are sensitive to weather conditions and may not hold in high temperatures or during rain It is strongly recommended to mount the antenna on the wall using the supplied bracket
272. r to outdoor Ethernet cable E Appendix E Parameters Summary Provides an at a glance summary of the configuration parameters value ranges and default values E Appendix F Troubleshooting BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp eS Contents Contents About this Manual xxi Contents xxii Figures xxvi Tables xxviii Chapter 1 System Description lt sciscioiccienaseansssseriassoesasecesnsaassasiasarnissasaanariasaunmeates 1 1 1 Introducing BreezeACCESSVL gadsnsade neii erineles eueniecl eetenieciended 2 1 2 Base Station Equipment ctensceccce screener cncsactnenieenesacauncnearcesceubaneesenenernenneaeeenacnenseaie 4 1 2 1 Modular Base Station Equipment LausssedmesesenmnnnsmtGaliedk ik kne 4 1 2 2 Standalone Micro cell Access Unit rrrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnr 6 1 3 S bscriber UMT LaodseeSRReN 7 L3 1 SU A E Subscriber WINS sinecnanip ioe a aE E TE 7 182 SUSS UNG sp assa a E E E a EE 9 13 3 STL SETE VS apene Se eee aladnde 10 1 34 Te Eve 10 14 DE Power hedoruessseruds eae serende 11 1 5 SU L Compal oo evecare cs eee le Be eect eee eee ae aaae Enie EEEE 13 1 6 BreezeACCESSVL BOB 4 9 GHz Only ccesccsescsaecccecseseccceecccares cetesc acs bedcdicecacssecsesinces 14 1 7 Networking Equipment ates teste cco ww csi Scene wt pees sewed eee 15 1 8 Management Systems acc cecesccecinecsat wenden deamedrnnsddenetsetadiesdatenenludinedwidecdecceenuaieennades 16 1 8 1 MTV 16 EL MSR 54 1
273. rame BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Ko D Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 20 Basic Rate Mechanism Received Frame Modulation Sent ACK Frame Modulation 1 2 1 3 4 3 5 6 7 8 5 HM Modulation Level 1 Sends all ACK frames in modulation 1 The default setting is Basic Rate 4 2 6 5 7 Average SNR Memory Factor The Average SNR Memory Factor defines the weight of history value of last calculated average SNR in the formula used for calculating the current average SNR for received data frames This average SNR is used by the ATPC algorithm in the AU and is also included in the Adaptive Modulation algorithm information messages transmitted by the AU and the SU The higher the value of this parameter the higher is the weight of history in the formula Available values 1 to 32 1 is for no weight for history meaning that average SNR equals the last measured SNR Default value 5 4 2 6 5 8 Number of HW Retries The Number of HW Retries parameter defines the maximum number of times that an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted When the Adaptive Modulation algorithm is disabled a frame will be dropped when the number of unsuccessful retransmissions reaches this value For details on the effect of this parameter when the Adaptive Modulation algorithm is enabled refer to section Adaptive Modulation on page 182 INFORMATION The Number of HW Retries parameter is
274. rate reported by the unit see Total Rx events in section 4 2 5 1 2 To ensure that sensitivity is not reduced too much and SUs are not lost verify that the Age see Display Association Info in section 4 2 5 4 1 of all SUs is below 20 seconds Do not activate the OFDM Weak Signal parameter if the SNR is below 36 dB including a 10 dB fading margin Under normal conditions the OFDM Weak Signal should never be activated in the AU since the SNR of all SUs will be below 36 dB when ATPC is enabled The Noise Immunity Control submenu includes the following options Noise Immunity State Control The Noise Immunity State Control defines the activation mode of the Adaptive Noise Immunity mechanism Automatic or Manual The following parameters of the Noise Immunity Control mechanism are applicable only for Manual mode The default is Automatic For VL 900 units the default is Manual Noise Immunity Level The Noise Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against broadband interfering signals A higher value may reduce the number of errors at the expense of reduced sensitivity The range is from 0 to 4 In the current version only 0 and 4 should be used The default is 0 Spur Immunity Level The Spur Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against narrow band interfering signals such as spurious from signals at other frequencies A higher value may reduce the number of errors at the expense of reduced sensitivi
275. rator Defaults file from a remote FTP server The Configuration File Upload Download submenu includes the following options M Execute FTP GET PUT Configuration File The Execute FTP GET PUT Configuration File executes the upload download of a Configuration file or an Operator Defaults file according to the parameters defined below The following options are available Execute FTP Get Configuration File cfg Execute FTP Put Configuration File cfg Execute FTP Get Operator Defaults File cmr Execute FTP Put Operator Defaults File cmr M FTP Configuration File Source Dir The FTP Configuration File Source Dir option enables defining the source directory of the configuration Operator Defaults file Valid values A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters To clear the field press BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The default is an empty string M Configuration File FTP File Name The Configuration File FTP File Name option enables defining the name of the configuration file to be uploaded downloaded Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed The default is config cfg E Operator Defaults FTP File Name The Operator Defaults File Name option enables defining the name of the Operator Defaults file to be uploaded downloaded Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters An e
276. rent setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this appendix does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Unit Control Parameters Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Change Unit Name AU SU Up to 32 printable ASCII characters None Yes Change Read Only AU SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters public No Password Change Installer AU SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters user No Password Change Administrator AU SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters private No Password FTP SW Version File AU SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters VxWorks bz Yes Name An empty string is not allowed Configuration File AU SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters config cfg Yes Name An empty string is not allowed Operator Defaults File AU SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters operator cmr Yes Name An empty string is not allowed FTP Source Dir AU SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters None Yes Use to clear empty FTP Server IP Address AU S
277. rion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeLINK BreezeMAX BreezeLITE BreezePHONE 4Motion and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty Disclaimer a Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed under normal use and conditions will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen 14
278. rror Correction FEC coding Using the enhanced multi path resistance capabilities of OFDM modem technology BreezeACCESSVL enables operation in near and non line of sight NLOS environments These qualities enable service providers to reach a previously inaccessible and broader segment of the subscriber population Table 1 1 Frequency Bands Band Frequencies MHz 4 9 4900 5100 5 2 5150 5350 5 3 5250 5350 5 4 5470 5725 5 8 5725 5875 0 9 902 925 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Chapter 1 System Description Introducing BreezeACCESSVL The available frequencies as well as other parameters depend on applicable local regulations The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be configured according to applicable radio regulations and specific deployment considerations A BreezeACCESSVL system comprises the following M Customer Premise Equipment CPE BreezeACCESSVL Subscriber Units SUs E Base Station Equipment BS BreezeACCESSVL Access Units and supporting equipment E Networking Equipment Standard Switches Routers supporting connections to the backbone and or Internet E Management Systems SNMP based Management Billing and Customer Care and other Operation Support Systems BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O O e 1 2 1 2 1 Chapter 1 System Description Base Station Equipment Base Station Equipment The Access Units instal
279. rst Mode parameters are not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled 4 2 6 5 9 1 4 2 6 5 9 2 4 2 6 5 10 4 2 6 5 10 1 Burst Mode Option The Burst Mode Option enables or disables the Burst Mode operation The default is Enable Burst Mode Time Interval The Burst Mode Time Interval defines the burst size which is the time in which data frames are sent immediately without contending for the wireless medium The range is 1 to the value of the Maximum Burst Duration defined for the Sub Band The default is 5 milliseconds or the value of Maximum Burst Duration defined for the Sub Band the lower of the two values Adaptive Modulation The Adaptive Modulation algorithm enables adapting the modulation level of transmitted data to the prevailing conditions of the applicable radio link The algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous adaptive support for multiple Subscriber Units at different modulation levels as transmission s modulation level decisions are made separately for each associated SU Link quality fluctuates due to various environmental conditions Dynamically switching between the possible modulation levels increases the probability of using the maximum modulation level suitable for the current radio link quality at any given moment Adaptive Modulation Option This submenu allows users to enable disable the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm The default selection is Enable BreezeACCESS
280. rted parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 The unit calculates the maximum allowed Maximum Tx Power according to the unit properties and parameters listed above and displays the allowed range when the Maximum Tx Power parameter is selected For each modulation level the unit will use as maximum transmit power the minimum between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW and the Country Code for the specific modulation level The default Maximum Tx Power is the highest allowed value 4 2 6 2 8 2 2 Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters This option displays the Maximum Tx Power parameter and the current maximum Tx power for the different modulation levels 4 2 6 2 8 3 ATPC Parameters in AU 4 2 6 2 8 3 1 ATPC Option The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm The default is Enable 4 2 6 2 8 3 2 ATPC Option for SU L The ATPC Option for SU L enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control algorithm when connecting to SU L units in order to avoid saturation in the AU s receive circuits and prevent interference between two adjacent sectors Default value Disable INFORMATION The ATPC Option for SU L functionality will only work for a particular AU VL SU L pair only if both units use the same Management VLAN ID and if Management VLAN Priority is set to 0 on the AU 4 2 6 2 8 3 3 ATPC Minimum SNR Level The Mi
281. s sersaaanaaaannsnasa va MAMABBMA V de j O em aadi Figure 2 18 Window Mounting with Rotation Capability BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O a 57 2 6 2 6 1 2 6 2 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment The following sections describe the slot assignment for the Base Station chassis provide illustrated descriptions of the power supply modules and Access Unit network interface modules and describe how to install the Base Station equipment BS SH Slot Assignment The Base Station chassis comprises ten slots as shown in Figure 2 19 8 Middle slots BS AU modules Extreme slots Power supply modules Figure 2 19 BS SH Chassis Slot Assignment To enable power supply redundancy two BS PS power supply modules can be installed in the wider side slots If a single power supply module is used it can be inserted into either one of the two available slots The remaining eight slots can hold up to six BS AU modules Unused slots should remain covered until required The design of the BS SH supports collocation of BreezeACCESSVL Access Units with Access Units belonging to other BreezeACCESSfamilies using GFSK modulation It supports any mixture of BS AU modules with BreezeACCESSGFSK BS AU modules including an optional BS GU GPS module If Access Units belonging to other BreezeACCESSfamilies are used then it is necessary to u
282. s 4 2 4 3 Network Management Parameters M Wiz2 IP Address SU Refer to section Wi2 IP Address SU Only on page 158 for a description of this parameter 4 2 4 4 Air Interface Parameters E ESSID M Operator ESSID Parameters AU Operator ESSID Option Operator ESSID M Hidden ESSID Option AU M Hidden ESSID SU Hidden ESSID Support Hidden ESSID Timeout M Frequency Definition Select Sub Band AU if more than one is available Frequency AU User Defined Frequency Subsets SU DFS Parameters if DFS is supported by Country Code DFS Required By Regulations Frequency Subset Definition AU Channel Check Time Channel Avoidance Period SU Waiting Option AU Minimum Pulses to Detect Channel Reuse Parameters Remote Radar Event Reports AU ETSI Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands Remote Radar Events Monitoring Period AU ETSI Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands DFS Detection Algorithm Universal Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands SS ce ee Clear Radar Detected Channels after Reset BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Best AU Parameters SU Best AU Support Preferred AU MAC Address M Cell Distance Parameters AU Cell Distance Mode Maximum Cell Distance Fairness Factor Per SU Distance Learning HM ATPC Parameters ATPC Option ATPC Option for SU L ATPC Minimum SNR Level SU ATPC Delt
283. s 4 2 6 2 2 ESSID Parameters The ESSID Extended Service Set ID is a string used to identify a wireless network and to prevent the unintentional merging of two wireless networks or two sectors in the same network Typically a different ESSID is defined for each AU To facilitate easy addition of SUs to an existing network without a prior knowledge of which specific AU will serve it and to support the Best AU feature a secondary global ESSID namely Operator ESSID can be configured in the AU If the Operator ESSID Option is enabled at the AU the Beacon frames transmitted by it will include both the ESSID and Operator ESSID The SU shall regard such frames if either the ESSID or the Operator ESSID matches it own ESSID The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is eventually associated is defined as the Run Time ESSID of the SU Typically the initial ESSID of the SU is configured to the value of the Operator ESSID When the SU has become associated with a specific AU its ESSID can be reconfigured to the value of the ESSID of the AU To support increased security the ESSID may be hidden When this feature is activated in AU it will not broadcast the ESSID in Beacon frames null characters will be transmitted instead of the ESSID The ESSID will not be transmitted also in Distance messages transmitted by either the AU or the associated SUs The following frames will still contain the ESSID M Probe Request generated by SUs when active scannin
284. s and nuts supplied in the Tilt kit 2 Mount the Tilt accessory on a 1 to 4 pole using two 9 16 metal bands 3 Release slightly the Tilt Control Screw tilt the ODU downward upward as required and re tighten the screw 2 3 3 Protecting ODU Connections Use appropriate sealing material to protect the connection against moisture and humidity Use removable sealing material such as a tar seal to enable future access to the connector BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Q Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Outdoor Unit INFORMATION Use high quality sealing material such as Scotch 130C Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape from 3M to ensure protection against dust and water Loop and tie the cable near the unit for strain relief and for routing water away from the unit use additional cable strips to route the cable such that water can accumulate on the cable bends away from the unit 2 3 4 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables The Grounding screw marked is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit in the new ODU it is located on the backside of the unit The Antenna RF connector marked Y is located on the top panel of the AU E ODU SU E ODU To connect the grounding cable I Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding terminal and tighten the grounding screw firmly 2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground earth connection To connect the RF cable units wit
285. s for the SU created the need for the Best AU feature to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood When the Best AU feature is used each of the AUs is given a quality mark based on the level at which it is received by the SU The SU scans for a configured number of cycles gathering information from all the AUs with which it can communicate At the end of the scanning period the SU reaches a Best AU decision according to the information gathered The AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best AU and the SU will immediately try to associate with it The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received by the SU The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as the preferred AU INFORMATION Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long term conditions prior to the decision time it may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time Note also that the decision is made only once during the scanning interval The decision may not remain the optimal one for ever If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served by them overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to re initiate the Best AU decision process 4 2 6 2 6 1 The Best AU Parameters menu includes the following options Best AU Support The Best AU Support option enables or disables the Be
286. s for which the calculated SNR before the change was relatively low The Noise Floor Calculation Parameters submenu includes the following options Calculation Mode The Calculation Mode defines the method used for calculation the Noise Floor value to be used by the device for estimating the quality of received signals The available options are M Fully Automatic According to the built in noise floor calculation mechanism E Forced The Noise Floor value is set manually to the value configured for the Forced Value parameter see below Typically this mode should be used only for special testing purposes E Automatic with Minimum Value If the calculated Noise Floor using the built in mechanism is higher than the value configured for the Forced Value parameter the calculated value will be used Otherwise the Forced Value will be used The default option is Fully Automatic Forced Value The Forced Value parameter enables configuring the Noise Floor to be used if the selected Calculation Mode is Forced This is also the minimum value to be used if the selected Calculation Mode is Automatic with Minimum Value If you decided to change the calculation mode to Automatic with Minimum Value and you still experience problems in the link long association time exceptionally low throughput try to improve it by increasing the configured Forced Value The available range is from 107 to 55 dBm The default value is M 5 MHz bandwidth 1
287. se Immunity Control parameters All Noise Floor Calculation parameters Network Management Wi2 IP Address SU Parameters Performance Parameters Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O B Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 3 Parameters that are not changed after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults Continued Parameters Group Parameter Bridge Parameters VLAN ID Management Service Provider VLAN ID SU VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype MAC Address List AU MAC Address List Action AU Service Parameters DRAP Option AU UDP Port AU Max Number of Voice Calls AU DRAP TTL AU Wireless Link Prioritization Option AU Low Priority AIFS AU Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic AU Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic AU AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic AU AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic AU SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic AU SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic AU Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent Country Code Parameters Selected Country Code 4 2 3 2 1 3 Set Complete Operator Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4 2 4 2 3 2 1 4 Set Partial Operator Defaul
288. se Station Equipment BS PS DC 33v sv OVER TEMP ON Figure 2 21 BS PS DC Front Panel The BS PS DC provides a power input connector marked 48 VDC for connecting the 48 VDC power source to the module The color codes of the cable wires are as follows M Black pin 2 48 VDC M White pin 1 Return M Shield pin 3 The ON OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply module The functionality of the LEDs is described in Table 2 6 2 6 4 BS AU Network Interface Module Figure 2 22 shows the front panel of the BS AU Access Unit Network Interface module BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O E 60 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment wuk ODU CURRENT CONSUMPTION ooustaus RESET Figure 2 22 BS AU Front Panel The BS AU provides the following interfaces M 10 100 BaseT A 10 100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS AU to the network A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the module to a hub router or switch M RADIO A 10 100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS AU to an AU ODU outdoor unit CAUTION A Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port The RADIO port supplies DC power to the ODU and this may harm other equipment connected to it 2 6 5 gt The recessed RESET switch on the front panel is for resetting the outdoor unit Installing the BS SH Chassis
289. se tables which is 1021 1024 minus the number of special Sp addresses as defined above for Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter for Association Info The default value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee 110 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Display Association Info Displays information regarding the Subscriber Units associated with the AU Each list entry includes the following information The MAC Address of the associated Subscriber Unit Age in seconds indicating the elapsed time since receiving the last packet from the Subscriber Unit The value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter of the Subscriber Unit The Status of the Subscriber Unit There are three options I Associated 2 Authenticated 3 Not Authenticated a temporary status The various status states are described below this is a simplified description of the association process without the effects of the Best AU algorithm BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp ee dd Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 5 Authentication and Association Process Message Direction Status in AU SU Status Scanning A Beacon with correct ESSID AU 3 SU SU Status Synchronized Authentication Request SU 3 AU Not authenticated Authentication Succes
290. se two power supply modules one BS PS AC or DC power supply for the BreezeACCESSVL Access Units and one BS PS GFSK AC or DC for the BreezeACCESSGFSK Access Units BS PS AC Power Supply Module The BS PS AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS AU modules installed in the BS SH chassis Figure 2 20 shows the BS PS AC front panel BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp e 2 6 3 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment BS PS AC 33v sv OVER Temp an WARNING 1 CONNECT POWER CORD AFTER P 8 18 INSERTED 2 DISCONNECT POWER CORD BEFORE P S 15 REMOVED Figure 2 20 BS PS AC Front Panel The BS PS AC includes a power input connector marked AC IN for connecting the AC power cord to the mains The ON OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply module Table 2 6 BS PS LED Functionality Name Description 54V Green LED Indicates that the 54V power supply module is OK 3 3V Green LED Indicates that the 3 3V power supply module is OK OVER TEMP Red LED Indicates an over temperature condition in the power supply module BS PS DC Power Supply Module The BS PS DC is a DC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS AU modules installed in the BS SH chassis Figure 2 21 shows the BS PS DC front panel BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Modular Ba
291. sful AU gt SU Authenticated SU Status Authenticated Association Request SU 3 AU Authenticated Association Successful AU gt SU Associated SU Status Associated ACK SU gt AU Associated Data Traffic SU AU Associated The SNR of the SU measured at the AU The RSSI of the SU measured at the AU The Unit Name of the SU The SW version of the SU The Unit Type of the SU Distance from the AU IP Address Wi2 IP Address as defined in the SU or 0 0 0 0 for none The ESSID of the SU In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info The database includes the following information The current number of entries This is the number of currently associated SUs BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp a Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions M The SU failed to respond to 100 consecutive data frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out M During the last 6 minutes or more the SU did not transmit any data frame and failed to respond to certain frames that typically are transmitted by the AU every 10 seconds Since the sampling interval for this state is about 10 minutes it means that the decision to remove the SU from the Associations Database will take pl
292. smission attempts at progressively lower modulations The retransmission mechanism described above does not apply for test frames sent for evaluating link quality on higher modulations If the number of HW retries is lower than 3 or if the initial modulation is lower than 4 the number of modulations used for retransmission will be limited as shown in Table 4 22 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual e amp Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Table 4 22 Examples of Retransmissions on Different Modulation Levels Scenario Transmission Attempts Modulation Tries Initial Modulation 8 8 8 Number of HW Retries 10 7 1 Total Number of Tries 1410 11 6 1 5 1 Initial Modulation 6 6 3 Number of HW Retries 5 5 1 Total Number of Tries 145 6 4 1 3 1 Initial Modulation 7 7 1 Number of HW Retries 2 6 1 Total Number of Tries 1 2 3 5 1 Initial Modulation 3 3 11 Number of HW Retries 12 2 1 Total Number of Tries 1412 13 1 1 4 2 6 5 10 3 1Packet Threshold To Test Up Rate When the number of frames transmitted on the current modulation reaches this number the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm will test the upper modulation The available range is between 10 and 10000 The default value is 30 4 2 6 5 10 3 2Packet No On Upper Rate This option indicates the number of frames used by the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm to t
293. ss link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices If disabled these packets are not sent to the wireless link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link Disable the Unicast Relaying parameter only if all unicast messages from the wireless link are certain to be directed to the local wired LAN The default selection is Enable MAC Address List AU only The MAC Address List submenu enables to define a list of up to 100 MAC addresses as belonging to devices that are either granted or denied service When the list is defined as a Deny List the AU will not provide services to a unit whose MAC address is included in the list enabling to disconnect units in cases such as when the user had fraudulently succeeded to configure the unit to values different from the subscription plan When the list is defined as an Allow List the AU will provide services only to units with a MAC address that is included in the list In addition the Station Allowed Option enables defining whether an SU with any MAC address can try to associate with the AU or only SUs with a MAC address starting with 00 10 E7 the supplier s MAC addresses range The MAC Address List submenu includes the following Add MAC Address to List Select Add MAC Address to List to add a MAC Address to the List Remove MAC Address from List Select Remove MAC Address from List to remove a MAC Address from the List MAC Address List Action This parameter defines t
294. ssion Notices This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to ETSI EN 301 489 1 rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial business and industrial environments This BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Legal Rights equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to EN 301 489 1 rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial business and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
295. ssioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual The File Download Upload feature simplifies the task of remotely configuring a large number of units using TFTP protocol By downloading the configuration file to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured for the unit as a plain ASCII text file It is necessary to edit the file using a simple editor and remove certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to another unit The file loading procedure can also be used for uploading a feature license file to multiple units When multiple configurations are being done simultaneously that is the file is being uploaded to several units it is recommended that the file will include only the required parameters In the configuration file the following three fields represent each parameter I A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the Monitor program followed by 2 The value of the parameters which uses the same values as the Monitor program 3 An optional comment If used the comment should start with a character An unknown parameter or a known parameter with a value that is invalid or out of range will be ignored Use the SNMP write community string the default
296. st AU selection feature The default is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp T Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION If the Best AU feature is not used the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID 4 2 6 2 6 2 Number Of Scanning Attempts When the Best AU option is enabled the SU gathers information on neighboring AUs for approximately 2 seconds on each of the scanned frequencies The Number of Scanning Attempts parameter defines the number of times that the process will be repeated for all relevant frequencies A higher number may result in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the SU is not operational Valid values 1 255 Default value 4 4 2 6 2 6 3 Preferred AU MAC Address The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter defines a specific AU with which the SU should associate Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in network management The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with which the SU should associate To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it finds the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled Once the SU has identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address it will associate with it and terminate the scanning process If the preferred AU is not found
297. st T hours Radar Activity Assessment Period When the Channel Reuse Option is enabled then by the end of the Channel Avoidance Period the unit will attempt returning to the original frequency provided these conditions are met The Channel Reuse Parameters submenu includes the following options E Channel Reuse Option Enabling disabling the Channel Reuse algorithm The default is Disable E Radar Activity Assessment Period The period in hours used for assessment of radar activity in the original channel The range is 1 to 12 hours The default is 5 hours E Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period The maximum number of radar detections in the original channel during the Radar Activity Assessment Period that is required for reaching a decision to try again the original channel The range is 1 to 10 radar detections The default is 5 radar detections DFS Detection Algorithm The DFS Detection Algorithm option is applicable only to units using a Universal Country Code in either the 5 4 GHz or the 5 8 GHz band Country Codes 1060 and 1064 enabling to select the DFS detection algorithm if DFS should be enabled The available options are ETSI and FCC The default is ETSI Remote Radar Event Reports ETSI Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands If a minimum number of SUs in the sector report a radar presence on a particular channel in a limited period of time the AU will initiate the DFS mechanism on that channel The Remote R
298. t over tighten BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp B 53 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I 4 Attach the assembled plates to the flat rear side of the antenna Use the two remaining M5 screws to fasten them 5 Fasten the antenna to the wall Use the two 8 screws provided with the kit Do not over tighten 6 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the antenna Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna Do not over tighten Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool 7 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing the direction of the Base Station Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure the antenna is aimed correctly Figure 2 16 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Ga Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I 2 5 5 3 Window Mount The installation kit includes 2 suction cups I Attach the suction cups to the antenna Refer to Figure 2 17 for directions 2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass Attach it to the window by pressing the suction cups onto the glass 3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the antenna Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna Do not over tighten Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool CAUTION The suction cups are sensitive to weather conditions and may not hold in high temperatures o
299. t s behavior on the next higher modulation except on modulation 8 in an attempt to increase the modulation In general the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm provides an overall better performance in case of interference and a decrease in the retransmissions percentage over the original Adaptive Modulation algorithm 4 2 6 5 10 3 Statistics Based Rate Control Parameters INFORMATION j Statistics Based Rate Control is only supported in units with HW Revision C or higher This submenu configures parameters for the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm When enabled the Statistics Based Rate Control algorithm constantly evaluates the achievable throughput for a particular modulation by counting the number of packets that are successfully transmitted and the packets that are not received and that need to be retransmitted Based on these statistics and on each modulation s specific data rate it will calculate the real throughput that the unit can support in the current conditions for a particular modulation When choosing between modulations up to a limit a small number of retransmissions on a higher modulation is compensated by the overall better performance ensured by that modulation When a critical retransmissions percentage is reached however it is necessary to decrease the modulation to achieve better throughputs as shown in Table 4 21 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Administration M
300. t system in which all single points of failure can be avoided BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Eo Chapter 1 System Description Management Systems AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality Device Discovery Device Inventory Topology Fault Management Configuration Management Data Collection Performance Monitoring Device embedded Software Upgrade Security Management Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations AlvariSTAR is a unique state of the art power multiplier in the hands of the service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers AlvariSTAR dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio of services and to support rapid customer base expansion BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Specifications Radio Table 1 8 Radio Specifications Item Description Frequency E 0 9 GHz Family 902 925 MHz E 4 9 GHz Family 4 900 5 100 GHz E 5 2 GHz Family 5 150 5 350 GHz E 5 3 GHz Family 5 250 5 350 GHz E 5 4 GHz Family 5 470 5 725 GHz E 5 8 GHz Family 5 725 5 875 GHz Operation Mode Time Division Duplex TDD Channel Bandwidth1 20 MHz 10 MHz HW Revision C and higher 5 MHz 0 9 GHz units only HW Revision G AUs and HW Revision F SUs Central Freq
301. t the PC with the Set Factory Defaults utility to the Ethernet port of the unit Set Factory Defaults oo ro ev fjes goo fjer Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility 2 Enter the unit s MAC address 3 Click on the Set button This utility performs the same operation as Set Complete Factory Defaults restoring the default factory configuration of all parameters except to Passwords general FTP parameters and AU s Frequency BreezeACCESS System Manual amp O Appendix D Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this appendix does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual I The Indoor to Outdoor cable provides pin to pin connection on both ends Figure D 1 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor to Outdoor cable 132 748 ker Figure D 1 Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments The color codes used in cables that are supplied with crimped co
302. ta communication and telecommunication equipment The 10 100BaseT ports of the AU modules can be connected directly to a multi port router or to an Ethernet switch connected to a router The point to point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired or wireless Data to the Internet is routed to the backbone through standard routers BreezeACCESS VL System Manual E Chapter 1 System Description Management Systems 1 8 Management Systems The end to end IP based architecture of the system enables full management of all components from any point in the system BreezeACCESSVL components can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP agents that implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage other system components including switches routers and transmission equipment Security features incorporated in BreezeACCESSVL units restrict access for management purposes to specific IP addresses and or directions that is from the Ethernet and or wireless link In addition the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers Customer Care systems and AAA Authentication Authorization and Admission tools 1 8 1 AlvariCRAFT AlvariCRAFT is an SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol application designed for on line management of system components This utility simp
303. ta defined in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port M The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless link before they are transmitted on the Ethernet port The VLAN ID Data affects frames received from the Ethernet port as follows M A VLAN Data Tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the Ethernet port before transmission on the wireless link The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Data and the VLAN Priority Data parameters M Tagged frames received on Ethernet port which are meant to be forwarded to the wireless link port are discarded This includes frames with tagging for prioritization purposes only VLAN ID Management The VLAN ID Management is applicable for all link types It enables defining the VLAN ID for management frames which identifies remote stations for management purposes This applies to all management applications using protocols such as SNMP TFTP ICMP ping DHCP and Telnet All servers stations using these protocols must tag the management frames sent to the unit with the value of the VLAN ID Management parameter Valid values 1 to 4094 or 65535 No VLAN The default value is 65535 If the VLAN ID Management is other than 65535 M Only single tagged management frames with a matching VLAN ID or double tagged management frames with a matching Service Provider VLAN ID received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit E A VLAN M
304. tections in Assessment Period DFS Detection AU SU Applicable only for Universal ETSI Yes BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Steps Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Remote Radar Event AU Applicable only for ETSI 0 disabled Yes Reports Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands 0 512 Remote Radar Events AU Applicable only for ETSI 30 Yes Monitoring Period Country Codes in 5 4 5 8 GHz bands 1 30 minutes Clear radar Detected AU E Disable Disable Yes Channels After M Enable Reset Country Code AU E Disable Disable Yes Learning by SU E Enable Transmit Power AU SU 10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes depends on HW revision value Country Code Antenna Gain and in SU the Max Tx Power parameter Maximum Tx Power SU 10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes depends on HW revision and value Country Code Antenna Gain ATPC Option AU SU Mf Disable Enable Yes E Enable ATPC Option for SU L AU E Disable Disable Yes E Enable Delta from Minimum AU 4 20 dB E Units in 5 4 5 8 Yes SNR Level GHz bands 5 dB E Units in the 4 9 5 2 and 5 3 GHz bands 8 dB Minimum SNR Level AU 4 60 dB 28 dB Yes Minimum Interval AU 1 3600 seconds 30 seconds Yes Between ATPC Messages ATPC Power Level AU 1 20 dB 4 Yes BreezeACCESS System Manual Appendix E Parameters Summary Paramet
305. ter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters When the Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter is enabled and the specified limit is reached the unit will send a trap The trap will be sent periodically till the number of broadcast multicast packets will be less than the maximum The trap will inform the user how many packets were discarded in the last period The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Option The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Option defines the limiter s functionality The available options are M Disable No limiter M Limit only Broadcast Packets M Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts M Limit All Multicast Packets including broadcast The default selection is Disable Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Threshold The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Threshold defines the maximum number of packets per second that will pass the limiter when it is enabled The range is from 0 to 204800 packets second The default is 50 packets Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval defines the minimum time in minutes between two consecutive transmissions of the trap indicating the number of packets that were dropped by the limiter since the previous trap or since the time that the limit has been exceeded The range is from 1 to 60
306. th Administrator access rights The available options are HM Set Defaults M Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults Set Defaults The Set Defaults submenu enables reverting the system parameters to a predefined set of defaults There are two sets of default configurations A Factory Defaults This is the standard default configuration B Operator Defaults Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the Administrator using the Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults option in this menu It may also be defined at the factory according to specific operator s definition The default Operator Defaults configuration is the Factory Defaults configuration The current configuration file and the Operator Defaults configuration file can be uploaded downloaded by the unit using FTP For more information see section Configuration File Upload Download on page 98 option These files can also be uploaded downloaded remotely using TFTP see Appendix B The available options in the Set Defaults submenu are M Set Complete Factory Defaults M Set Partial Factory Defaults BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D 29 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Set Complete Operator Defaults M Set Partial Operator Defaults M Cancel Current Pending Request 4 2 3 2 1 1 Set Complete Factory Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to
307. than one country In these cases the Country Code includes a 4 digits proprietary group code and the Country Group name for example FCC E Data Encryption Support Indicates whether data encryption is supported for the applicable country M AES Encryption Support Indicates whether encryption using AES is supported for the applicable country BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp va Q Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Authentication Encryption Support Indicates whether authentication encryption is supported for the applicable country For each of the available sets Sub Bands the following information is provided E Sub Band ID and Frequencies E Allowed Bandwidth If more than one bandwidth is allowed then each bandwidth is associated with a different sub band as the bandwidth may affect the available frequencies E Regulation Max Tx Power at Antenna Port The maximum transmit power allowed at the antenna port of the unit M Regulation Max EIRP The maximum allowed EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power in dBm or No Limit Min Modulation Level The lowest allowed modulation level Max Modulation Level The highest allowed modulation level Burst Mode Indicates whether Burst Mode operation is allowed Maximum Burst Duration If Burst Mode is allowed this parameter displays the upper limit for the Maximum Burst Duration M DFS Option Indicates whether the DFS Dynamic Frequency Selec
308. that is hosting the SW Version file The default is 10 0 0 253 M FTP Gateway IP Address The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address The default is 0 0 0 0 E FTP User Name The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx M FTP Password The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx M Show SW Version Download Parameters and Status Displays the current values of the SW Version Download parameters the current SW version and the SW versions stored in the Flash memory INFORMATION There is one set of general FTP parameters FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name and FTP Password This set or relevant parts of the set serves the SW Download Procedure the pr Configuration File Upload Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure Changing any of these parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures 4 2 3 12 Configuration File Upload Download The Configuration File Upload Download submenu enables the optional uploading or downloading of a configuration or an Ope
309. the applicable Country Code Applicable only if DFS is supported by the Sub Band Configurable only in units without an integral antenna Partial only after the unit re enters radar scanning for example after a frequency change sub band change etc E 1 4 Network Management Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Access to Network AU SU From Wireless Link Only From Both No Management E From Ethernet Only Ethernet and E From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Wireless Link Network Management AU SU lf Disable Disable No Filtering E Activate Management IP Filter On Ethernet Port E Activate Management IP Filter On Wireless Port E Activate Management IP Filter On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports Set Network AU SU IP address 0 0 0 0 No Management IP all 10 entries Address Set Change Network AU SU lt start address gt to lt end address gt 0 0 0 0 TO No Management IP or 0 0 0 0 Address Ranges lt base address gt mask lt mask gt all 10 entries BreezeACCESS System Manual amp Appendix E Parameters Summary Parameters Summary Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Send SNMP Traps AU E Disable Disable Yes E Enable SNPM Traps IP AU IP address 0 0 0 0 No Destination all 10 entries SNMP Traps AU Up to 14 printable ASCII public No Community characters all 10 entries Wi2 IP Ad
310. the rule Show VLAN Rule Displays the rule s parameters values in both its New state settings that were entered but haven t been saved yet and Current state settings that are currently in use Table 4 18 describes how Layer 2 broadcast and multicast frames are handled and how the VLAN Multicast Allowed setting affects this behavior Table 4 18 Layer 2 Broadcast Multicast Frames Behavior Rule Match Broadcast Frames Multicast Frames The frame matches at least one rule Frame is handled according to the rule with the highest precedence No VLAN Multicast Frame is multiplied and Frame is multiplied and match Allowed Enabled tagged with each distinct tagged with each distinct VLAN ID that was specified in VLAN ID that was specified in the rules the rules VLAN Multicast Frame is dropped Allowed Disabled BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp a Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION An Ethernet frame is considered multicast if the LSB Least Significant Bit of the first byte of its MAC address has the value 1 4 2 6 4 1 9 2 Show Rule List Lists all the 8 rules along with their current parameters 4 2 6 4 1 10 VLAN ID Extended Trunk SU only Indicates the VLAN ID that is going to be tagged into the VLAN untagged frames arriving via Ethernet or removed from the VLAN tagged frames arriving via WLAN when working in Extended Tru
311. the unit automatically exits the Monitor program The time out duration can range from 1 to 999 minutes The default value is 5 minutes BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O 94 4 2 3 7 4 2 3 8 4 2 3 9 4 2 3 9 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Ethernet Negotiation Mode The Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode submenu displays the current Ethernet port state and enables defining the negotiation mode of the Ethernet port The available options are M Force 10 Mbps and Half Duplex M Force 10 Mbps and Full Duplex M Force 100 Mbps and Half Duplex M Force 100 Mbps and Full Duplex M Auto Negotiation 10 100 Mbps and Half Full Duplex The default is Auto Negotiation 10 100 Mbps and Half Full Duplex Change System Location The Change System Location option enables changing the system location of the unit which is also the sys location in MIB2 The System Location is also displayed as a part of the Monitor menu s header Valid values A string of up to 35 printable ASCII characters The default system location is an empty string Event Log Menu The Event Log Menu enables controlling the event log feature The event log is an important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it Events are classified according to their severity level Message lowest severity Warning Error or Fatal highest severity The severity level of events that should be saved in the Ev
312. this parameter will be none empty M SU 54 Support AUS only Supported or Not Supported Indicates whether the AUS can support SU 54 units support of SU 54 units by AUS is a licensed feature available for all AUS units M Wireless Link Prioritization Support AU only Supported or Not Supported Indicates whether the unit supports the Wireless Link Prioritization feature Show Basic Configuration The Show Basic Configuration menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu Show Advanced Configuration The Show Advanced Configuration menu enables to access the read only sub menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the applicable sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu Show Country Dependent Parameters Each country has its radio regulation regarding transmissions in the applicable bands that affect parameters such as available frequencies bandwidth transmit power etc Some other parameters and options may also vary among countries For each country one or more sets of parameters are pre configured in the factory If more than one set is available the set to be used can be selected The Show Country Dependent Parameters displays the available set s of these parameters and includes the following M Country Code The up to 3 digits country code according to ISO 3166 and the country name Some regulatory requirements apply to more
313. thomeeniquameeneedaas 59 Figure 2 2 l BS PS DC Front Panelisteina E a 60 Feue 2 22 BS AU Front Panel kerriae NTR eae aad 61 BreezeACCESS System Manual 8 e Figures Figure 3 1 Connecting the Y cable sessiedsesaststenwceocsesssausztedeed sendsa nase scnnseeedoersaxanenttecdundeunenauaseuedeesec 70 Figure 4 1 Main Menu Administrator Level rerrnnnrnnrvrnnnnnnnnrennennnnnnrevvnnnnnnnrerennnnnnnnsreennnnnnnuseen 82 Feire 4 2 Service Provider UN scssi aerate deems 164 Figure D 1 Ethernet Connector Pin AssignmentS xxnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnen 214 BreezeACCESS System Manual eS Q Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 1 12 Table 1 13 Table 1 14 Table 1 15 Table 1 16 Table 1 17 Table 1 18 Table 1 19 Table 1 20 Table 1 21 Table 1 22 Table 1 23 Table 1 24 BreezeACCESS System Manual Tables Tables Frequency 2 EE eee cee eee EE EE 2 Access Unit EE EE RE EE EE PE 5 AU ANTENNAS isiin a EO eten eee 5 Subscriber Unit ODU NPE eda 7 SU A E Subscriber Unit Types uwrrnnnrvnnnnnrnrnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvenenennensrnssssnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnneeeeee 8 SU SUSTE UNS esssS a pea E EEEa Ei 9 SU L Subscriber Unit TypeS pcccrecercgtsacmtnaseresvctoenetnnacatwetecem cemnstonetonenngeretmietonemenataumeneta 10 Radio Specifications save 18 Data COMMUNICAt ON EE EEE E
314. tion mechanism for identification and avoidance of channels with radar activity is supported E Minimum HW Revision Support The minimum HW revision required to support the Sub Band 4 2 2 5 Show All Parameters The Show All Parameters menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of all status and configuration parameters INFORMATION The values of some security related parameters including the encryption Keys ESSID and Operator ESSID are available only with Administrator access rights 4 2 3 Unit Control Menu The Unit Control menu enables configuring control parameters for the unit The Unit Control menu includes the following options HM Reset Unit Default Settings Change Unit Name Change Password Flash Memory Control BreezeACCESS VL System Manual B a 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 2 3 2 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Log Out Timer Ethernet Negotiation Mode Change System Location Event Log Menu Feature Upgrade SW Version Download Configuration File Upload Download LED Mode Reset Unit The Reset Unit option enables resetting the unit After reset any modifications made to the system parameters are applied Default Settings The Set defaults submenu enables resetting the system parameters to a predefined set of defaults or saving the current configuration as the set of Operator Defaults The Default Setting options are available only to users wi
315. tion mode Select from the following options BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O E aD 4 2 6 1 4 2 4 2 6 1 5 4 2 6 2 4 2 6 2 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters M Select Disable to configure the IP parameters manually If this option is selected configure the static IP parameters as described above M Select DHCP Only to cause the unit to search for and acquire its IP parameters including the IP address subnet mask and default gateway from a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server only If this option is selected you must select the port s through which the unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server as described in section Access to DHCP on page 118 You do not have to configure static IP parameters for the unit DHCP messages are handled by the units as management frames M Select Automatic to cause the unit to search for a DHCP server and acquire its IP parameters from the server If a DHCP server is not located within approximately 40 seconds the currently configured parameters are used If this option is selected you must configure the static IP parameters as described above In addition you must select the port s through which the unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server as described in section Access to DHCP on page 118 The default is Disable Access to DHCP The Access to DHCP option enables defining the port through which the unit sear
316. tion Option enabled can accept non encrypted data frames E The Maximum Number of Associations must be set to a value of 124 or lower to enable Data Encryption As long as Data Encryption is enabled the Maximum Number of Associations cannot be set to a value higher than 124 The Maximum Number of Associations Limit 512 when Data Encryption is disabled 124 when Data Encryption is enabled is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display 4 2 6 7 3 Security Mode The Security Mode option enables selecting the algorithm to be used for encrypting the authentication messages and or data frames BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D 204 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The available options are WEP AES OCB and FIPS 197 The default is WEP INFORMATION On SU L AES CCM is compatible with FIPS 197 Select AES CCM on SU L when FIPS 197 is used by the pe AU CAUTION A AES OCB is supported by SU L only starting with SU L firmware version 3 1 30 patch 4 2 6 7 4 Default Key SU only The Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting decrypting the authentication messages Shared Key mode and or data frames Data Encryption enabled The AU learns the Default Key from the SU provided it is one of the Keys defined in the AU The AU may use different keys when authenticating and or communicating with different SUs Available values range from 1 to 4 The default is KEY 1 4 2 6 7
317. tion is enabled data packets in the queue of the internal bridge can be accumulated before the concatenated frame is transmitted to the wireless medium Data frames can be accumulated up to a maximum frame size of 2200 bytes for units with HW revision A or B or 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher In the AU the concatenation process is performed separately for each destination SU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual E Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters INFORMATION Using the Link Capability exchange mechanism each unit learns the HW Revision and the SW Version of the unit s associated with it A concatenated frame with a length exceeding 2200 bytes may be lp generated and transmitted only if both the source and destination units have HW Revision C or higher If either the source or destination unit uses SW Version 3 0 or 3 1 then the maximum size of the concatenated frame is 3400 bytes and the maximum number of data frames that can be bundled into a concatenated frame is 2 for units with SW version 3 0 and 8 for units with SW version 3 1 A frame is a candidate for bundling into a concatenated frame if all the following conditions are met M The frame is a data frame M The destination is an entity behind the destination AU SU M The destination AU SU can support the feature uses SW version 3 0 or higher When a frame is identified as an eligible candidate for concatenation it is
318. tion level parameters burst mode parameters revert to their factory default values and must be re configured BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O O 206 Appendix A Software Ver sion Loading Using TFTP INFORMATION Although SU L units provide functionalities that are similar to the rest of the VL SUs their features are not always identical and they use different setup interfaces For this purpose as a rule the content of this appendix does not apply to SU L subscriber units Unless explicitly specified otherwise any installation commissioning operation and administration instructions as well as any specifications that pertain to SUs in general do not cover the SU L series For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESS SU L Product Manual Firmware upgrades to the unit s FLASH memory can be performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application Before performing an upgrade procedure be sure you have the correct files and most recent instructions Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion s web site http www alvarion com CAUTION A Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to be inoperable gt To load software versions 1 Verify that IP connectivity to the required unit is established 2 Ensure that the IP address of the PC from which the upgrade is to be
319. to inform the AU about the new MIR CIR values After reassociation both units AU and SU will work with synchronized values for MIR CIR The following formula is used for calculating the applicable rates PIF x AvgRate 100 PIF x ThrRate UsedRate ThrRate x 100 x ConfiguredRate Where UsedRate Applicable uplink downlink MIR or CIR PIF Proportional IR Factor AvgRate Average Rate ConfiguredRate Configured uplink downlink MIR or CIR BreezeACCESS VL System Manual ee Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters ThrRate Proportional IR Threshold Rate The formula for the average rate is 8 S FjxR i 1 AvgRate Where F Number of frames sent on modulation i R Data rate in Mbps for modulation i Examples Table 4 25 Used Uplink MIR for Various PIF Values Configured Uplink MIR 54 Mbps Modulation Average Rate Uplink Used Uplink MIR Mbps EME Anes PIF 0 PIF 20 PIF 50 PIF 70 PIF 100 1 6 54 54 44 4 30 20 4 6 2 9 54 54 45 31 5 22 5 9 3 12 54 54 45 6 33 24 6 12 4 18 54 54 46 8 36 28 8 18 5 24 54 54 48 39 33 24 6 36 54 54 50 4 45 41 4 36 7 48 54 54 52 8 51 49 8 48 8 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 The following parameters are available for configuration M Proportional IR Factor Sets up the percentage for the Proportional IR Factor mechanism usage The higher the value the more weight the P
320. tor Section 4 2 6 6 2 7 Added Proportional IR Factor algorithm SW Version 6 0 October 2009 IP Range Prioritization Section 4 2 6 6 3 4 Added IP range prioritization for the priority queue SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Control Modulation Level Section 4 2 6 5 6 Added control for ACK frames modulation SW Version 6 0 October 2009 Beacon Period Section 4 2 6 2 20 Added control for time interval between consecutive beacons SW Version 6 5 October 2010 Max Beacons Lost Section 4 2 6 2 21 Added control for number of consecutive lost beacons for a link drop SW Version 6 5 October 2010 Antenna Compliance Statement Updated SW Version 6 6 July 2011 Modular Base Station Equipment Section 1 2 1 AUS BS now supports 25 SUs instead of 8 SW Version 6 6 July 2011 Standalone Access Units Section 1 2 2 AUS SA now supports 25 SUs instead of 8 SW Version 6 6 July 2011 SU V units Table 1 5 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 SU V now supports 12 Mbps downlink instead of 2 Mbps SW Version 6 6 July 2011 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Legal Rights Legal Rights Copyright 2011 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alva
321. tors behavior By default the LEDs indicate the SNR level which facilitates SU antenna s alignment However it is also possible to customize the SNR bar to indicate when specific thresholds for RSSI SNR CRC percentage and average modulation are reached BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp Ga 4 2 3 13 1 4 2 3 13 2 4 2 3 13 2 1 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Change Mode This submenu allows switching between the operation modes that are available for the LEDs The following options are available M Normal mode This is the default operation mode The green LEDs on the bar indicate the SNR level while the LED indicators show the unit s status ethernet and wireless activity See Outdoor Unit Verification on page 75 for detailed information M Threshold mode SU only This mode allows users to define a custom behavior for each of the 8 SNR LEDs based on the RSSI SNR CRC ratio or average modulation See Threshold Mode Settings SU only on page 100 for details on how to set it up Threshold Mode Settings SU only This submenu allows users to define the behavior for each LED in the SNR bar when the Threshold Mode is employed LED 1 to 8 Selects the LED you wish to configure You can define a threshold that must be reached for the LED to light up by using the menus described below 4 2 3 13 2 1 1 Threshold Type This option defines the parameter that is monitored and th
322. ts Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and management access The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Operator Defaults are listed in Table 4 3 4 2 3 2 1 5 Cancel Current Pending Request After selecting one of the Set defaults options it will be executed after the next reset This option enables to cancel the pending request before execution provided the unit has not been reset yet 4 2 3 2 2 Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults The Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults enables defining the current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O 4 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 4 2 3 5 4 2 3 6 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters Change Unit Name The Change Unit Name option enables changing the name of the unit which is also the system s name in the MIB2 The name of the unit is also used as the prompt at the bottom of each Monitor window Valid values A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters The default unit name is an empty string Change Password The Change Password submenu enables changing the access password s The Change Password submenu is available only to users with Administrator access rights Valid values A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters Refer to section Working wit
323. ts L uurages ogskenenejemieannidmku euenanmunendvaen 27 Table 1 26 Electrical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit nrurnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnennnnrnnnnrnnnernn 27 Table 1 27 25081 Antenna Specifications Lasmsssesdamnen Ganga nnetnesmddntgitdnig 27 Table 1 28 SU I D Wall Window Detached Antenna Specifications rnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnn 28 Table 1 29 Environmental Spedfcahonsu suumuansmmnsuusninnsem mukke kvm 28 Table 2 1 Subscriber Unit ODU Ty PES ierccastiece tena nete excuse dnews tanecsnadatadcscanteonshaatenateporenmeneuneaiensewenscens 30 Table 2 2 Access Unit ODU NPE Lassen 31 Table 2 3 Access Unit ODU NPE eierne 32 Table 2 4 Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables wrnrrrnnrnnnnnnvnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnernnnnnnnnnrnnnernnnnnnnnernnne 33 Table 2 5 SU Panel COMpOonents aise cts octets ce cacaatnciee ce ansece eaneenaeenawene tenn nansaieesewemeamnaceetandooesat 49 Table 2 6 BS PS LED Functionality Lasses 59 Table 3 1 Basic Parameters See 65 Table 3 2 Regulation Maximum EIRP suicscexecdssuredsnedsasannssnecutedavesseaaioundedsueddusatexstedanedanesabsietdaedomedeas 68 Table 3 3 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level rnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 73 Table 3 4 AU ODU LED ee 75 Table 3 5 SU ODU LEDS ven 75 Table 3 6 SU ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality In Normal Mode rvrvvnnnnnnnrvrvvnnnnnnnnrerernnnnnnnnnennnr 76 Table 3 7 BS AU LEDS aan 77 Table 3 8 PS1073 SU IDU AU SA ID
324. ttom side of the antenna Hand tighten do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool Do not over tighten BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O E Chapter 2 Installation Installing the SU I D ay FRN Arn 3 bh BI ei 3 ore 29 gt Fam AR ri we lis o H s ty a hel ut SKE i HE ti 1 LET i Sry p p H f p pil i E i t gt 5 Ly gt j vty og P Ky Gr ax v lt D fi Figure 2 15 Wall Mounting the Antenna 2 5 5 2 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability The installation kit includes 4 L type mounting plates one top one bottom one Wall V and one Wall H 6 M5 screws with washers and spring washers 2 plastic anchors and 2 48 screws I If anchors are needed wall board plaster board etc drill two holes 361 mm apart for the anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors Use a 9 64 drill bit for screwing directly into a solid surface stud 2 Assemble the top L type plate with the Wall V L type plate Note the Wall V plate is the one with the vertical ellipse on the short side Make sure the inscriptions are facing upwards Use two M5 screws to fasten the plates together Do not over tighten See Figure 2 16 3 Assemble the bottom L type plate with the Wall H L type plate Note the Wall H plate is the one with the horizontal ellipse on the short side Make sure the inscriptions are facing upwards Use two M5 screws to fasten the plates together Do no
325. ty BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp E 4 2 6 2 17 4 4 2 6 2 17 5 4 2 6 2 17 6 4 2 6 2 18 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters The range is from 0 to 7 The default is 0 OFDM Weak Signal The OFDM Week Signal parameter sets the threshold for immunity against interfering OFDM signals The available options are 0 or 1 A value of 1 means that the unit will immediately reject OFDM packets with a relatively low SNR The default is 0 Pulse Detection Sensitivity The Pulse Detection Sensitivity parameter affects the Phy error count If it is set to Low than all Phy errors will be reported as regular Phy errors regardless of the signal level If it is set to High all Phy errors with levels bellow a certain threshold not accessible to the user will be reported as regular Phy errors while those with levels higher than the threshold will be reported as detected radar pulses When DFS radar detection is used or during a Spectrum Analysis test the Pulse Detection Sensitivity is set internally to High regardless of the configured value The default is Low Show Noise Immunity Select this option to view the current values of the Noise Immunity Control parameters and some additional parameters of the ANI mechanism Noise Floor Calculation Parameters The Noise Floor calculation mechanism incorporated in the units is used for estimating the level of the noise floor This value is used for
326. ty Considerations For the following safety considerations Instrument means the BreezeACCESSVL units components and their cables Caution To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Line Voltage Before connecting this instrument to the power line make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument Radio The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna The long term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Legal Rights Ensure that outdoor units antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast when using external antenna are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage
327. uency Resolution 10 MHz for HW Revision A and B 5 MHz for HW Revision C and higher 1 MHz for 0 9 GHz units Antenna Port AU ODU SU E ODU N Type jack 50 ohm SU I SMA jack 50 ohm Max Input Power at antenna port HW Revision A 48 dBm typical HW Revision B and higher 30 dBm typical Maximum Output Power All units except 0 9 GHz units 21 dBm 0 9 GHz units 27 dBm SU A ODU Integral Antenna 21 dBi typical in the 5 150 5 875 GHz band 20 dBi in the 4 9 5 1 GHz band 10 5 AZ x 10 5 EL vertical polarization compliant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 New SU A ODU Integral Antenna 5 4 5 8 GHz 20 1 dBi typical in the 5 250 5 875 GHz band 14 AZ x 14 EL vertical horizontal polarization compliant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 ROHS SU I D Detached Antenna 15 dBi typical net excluding cable loss in the 5 150 5 875 GHz band 45 55 horizontal x 10 12 vertical vertical polarization ROHS compliant BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Table 1 8 Radio Specifications Continued Item Description AU Antennas E AU Ant 5G 16 60 16 dBi typical 5 150 5 875 GHz 60 AZ x 10 EL sector optional antenna vertical polarization compliant with ETSI EN 302 326 3 V1 2 1 2007 01 E AU Ant 5G 17 90 17 dBi typical 5 150 5 875 GHz 90 AZ x 6 EL sector antenna vertical polarization compl
328. unit using either one of these Country Codes is upgraded from a SW version lower than 5 2 the feature will not be automatically applicable If the user wants to use the DFS feature he must re apply the Country Code values see section Re apply Country Code Values on page 206 Note also that for these units if the user changes the working sub band the DFS Option will be automatically set to No For other Country Codes that support DFS when sub band is changed the DFS Option is forced to Yes The DFS Parameters submenu includes the following parameters 4 2 6 2 5 3 1 DFS Required by Regulations The DFS Required by Regulations option enables defining whether DFS should be used for compliance with applicable local regulations The options are Yes or No Selection of the No option will disable the radar detection and dynamic frequency selection mechanism The default depends on the Country Code No for Universal Country Codes in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz bands Yes for all other Country Codes that support DFS as required by applicable regulations 4 2 6 2 5 3 2 Channel Check Time The Channel Check Time defines the time allocated for checking whether there is a radar activity on a new frequency after power up or after attempting to move to a new frequency upon detecting radar activity on the previously used frequency During this time the unit does not transmit The range is 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 60 seconds INFORMATION l When ETSI country
329. upplied with the antenna to the SMA jack located on the unit s front panel Install the antenna using the instructions provided in Section Installing the Detached Antenna on page 51 on page 57 and connect to it the other end of the RF cable Do not over tighten the SMA connectors If parameters are not pre configured configure the basic parameters as described in Section Configuring Basic Parameters on page 65 Align the antenna as described in Section Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna on page 71 Connect the 10 100 Base T Ethernet connector to the data equipment The cable connection should be a crossed Ethernet if connecting to a hub switch and a straight cable if connecting directly to a PC Network Interface Card NIC Verify proper operation of the Ethernet link see Table 2 5 for the Ethernet activity LED indication To verify data connectivity from the end user s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit ping a known device in the network or try connecting to the Internet 2 5 5 Installing the Detached Antenna The detached antenna kit includes the following components ALA04 200160 panel antenna 2 meter SMA SMA M M RF cable Simple wall mounting kit enabling installation on a wall without any capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Wall Mount on page 52 Wall mounting kit with rotation capability enabling installation on a wall with capability for adjusting
330. upported parameters values and options refer to section Show Country Dependent Parameters on page 87 Currently all Sub Bands support the entire range of modulation levels from 1 to 8 However the highest modulation level supported by units with HW revision A is modulation level 7 The default value is the lowest supported modulation level modulation level 1 Maximum Modulation Level When the Adaptive Modulation algorithm see section Adaptive Modulation on page 182 is enabled it changes the modulation level dynamically according to link conditions The purpose is to increase the probability of using the maximum possible modulation level at any given moment Although the algorithm will avoid using modulation levels that are too high for the prevailing link conditions it might be better under certain conditions to limit the use of higher modulation levels If the link quality is not sufficient it is recommended that the maximum modulation level be decreased as higher modulation levels increase the error rate In such conditions a higher Maximum Modulation Level increases the number or retransmissions before the modulation level is being reduced by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm A high number of retransmissions reduces the overall throughput of the applicable SU as well as all other SUs associated with the same AU The link quality can be estimated based on the SNR measurement of the SU at the AU which can be viewed in the
331. ure the units prior to shipment to end users 1 3 3 SU L Subscriber Units SU L subscriber units provide a cost optimized entry level alternative to SU A E CPEs while delivering similar functionalities For detailed information regarding SU L units please refer to the BreezeACCESSSU L Product Manual Table 1 7 SU L Subscriber Unit Types SU Type Description SU 3 L Entry level CPE providing data throughputs up to 3 Mbps SU 6 L Medium rate CPE providing data throughputs up to 6 Mbps SU 12 L High rate CPE providing data throughputs up to 12 Mbps 1 3 4 The SU E BS The SU E BS is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit where the indoor unit is designed for installation in the Base Station chassis The outdoor unit is an SU E ODU with a connection to an external antenna The SU E BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications including applications where it is used in conjunction with a GFSK based system The functionality of the LEDs of the module is the same as the LEDs of a regular AU IDU module with one minor exception the W LNK LED indicates whether the SU E is associated with an AU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp a Q Chapter 1 System Description DC Power Injector 1 4 DC Power Injector The DC Power Injector is an indoor unit designed for sites in which protected DC sources are available 48 to 55 VDC such as many of the GSM sites This allows operators to utiliz
332. vel 1 is for the lowest radio rate and modulation scheme gt Modulation Level 8 is supported only in units with HW Revision B and above 1 9 2 Data Communication Table 1 9 Data Communication Item Description Standard compliance IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD VLAN Support Based on IEEE 802 1Q Layer 2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802 1p Layer 3 Traffic Prioritization E IP Precedence ToS RFC791 E DSCP RFC2474 E Source destination IP address Layer 4 Traffic Prioritization UDP TCP destination ports 1 9 3 Configuration and Management Table 1 10 Configuration and Management Item Description Management E Monitor program via Telnet E SNMP M Configuration upload download Management Access From Wired LAN Wireless Link Management access protection H Multilevel password M Configuration of remote access direction from Ethernet only from wireless link only or from both M Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations BreezeACCESS VL System Manual O KN O 20 Chapter 1 System Description Specifications Table 1 10 Configuration and Management Continued Item Description Security E Authentication messages encryption option E Data encryption option E WEP and AES OCB 128 bit encryption algorithms E FIPS 197 certified encryption for Access Units with HW revision C or higher E ESSID and Hidden ESSID SNMP Agents SNMP ver
333. will reset again and return to normal mode of operation The calibration process may take several minutes 6 seconds for each of the channels available in the tested sub band plus two resets If the calibration is running the user will not be able to start a spectrum analysis or a TFTP FTP session If the calibration failed the results of the previous successful calibration will be kept If the calibration passed the new results will be used for Noise Floor Indication Select Calibration Option to Use This option enables selection of the calibration option to be used by the device The available options are None Field and Factory If Factory option is available indicating that the unit was calibrated in the factory this is the option that should be used If Factory option is not available a Field calibration should be performed using the Run Calibration option and the Field option should be selected The None option should be used only if the Field Calibration is repeatedly failing see Show Noise Floor Calibration below or if the RSSI displayed when using the Field option following a successful Field calibration is clearly inaccurate indicating erroneous results The default is None Show Noise Floor Calibration Select this option to view the current status and parameters of Calibration of Noise Floor Indication The displayed parameters are M Field Calibration Status Indicating whether a Field Calibration is being p
334. will disable periodicity allowing only one time manually triggered Interference Mitigation scans The available range is 0 disabled or 10 10080 minutes Default value is 0 disabled 4 2 6 2 22 2 7 Frequency Subset AU only This setting allows you to select the channels that will be scanned during the Interference Mitigation process All the defined frequencies and their indexes will be displayed Frequencies are indexed with consecutive numbers starting from 1 Enter the desired channels corresponding indexes separated by commas for example 1 4 5 6 14 18 19 or enter A to select all defined frequencies 4 2 6 2 22 3 Activation Starts the Interference Mitigation process Keep in mind that during the scan the AU will lose connectivity to the associated SUs A final validation is required prior to the scan E 0 Cancel Operation E 1 Activate Interference Mitigation Causes Automatic Reset BreezeACCESS VL System Manual eS Q 4 2 6 2 22 4 4 2 6 2 22 5 4 2 6 3 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters After reset the Interference Mitigation statistics file will be updated and depending on the Scanning Type you defined the unit may be configured to a new operating channel and or noise floor During the Interference Mitigation process the scan readings and calculation results are updated in real time in the Event Log At the end of the process following the second reset all feedback from
335. with read only access rights only the Info Screens option is displayed Users with this access level are not able to access the Unit Control Basic Configuration Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus M For users with Installer access rights the first four menu items Info Screens Unit Control Basic Configuration and Site Survey are displayed Users with this access level are not able to access the Advanced Configuration menu M For users with Administrator access rights the full Main Menu is displayed These users can access all menu items 4 12 Common Operations The following describes the standard operations used when working with the Monitor program M Type an option number to open or activate the option In certain cases you may need to press Enter E Press Esc to exit a menu or option INFORMATION The program is automatically terminated following a determined period of inactivity The default time out is 5 minutes and is configured with the Log Out Timer parameter In some cases to activate any configuration changes you must reset the unit Certain settings are automatically activated without having to reset the unit Refer to Appendix E for information on which BreezeACCESS VL System Manual B eo Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Working with the Monitor Program parameters are run time configurable which means that the unit need not be reset for the parameter to take effect and whi
336. y This link type extends the Access mode s functionality by allowing it to work with up to 8 different VLAN IDs instead of one Based on a predefined set of rules the SU will apply a specific VLAN ID and priority tag to untagged frames that are routed from Ethernet to WLAN The VLAN IDs from the configured set of rules will be used to filter the VLAN tagged frames that are routed from WLAN to Ethernet then the SU removes the tags 4 2 6 4 1 3 6 Extended Trunk Link SU only This link type extends the Trunk mode s functionality by allowing it to also work with VLAN untagged frames instead of dropping them All untagged frames received via Ethernet will be tagged with a predefined VLAN ID and routed to WLAN Consequently tagged frames received over WLAN that match BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp O Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters this VLAN ID will be untagged before being routed to Ethernet The exact behavior is shown in Table 4 16 Table 4 16 Extended Trunk Frame Routing Incoming Frame Type Wireless to Ethernet Traffic Ethernet to Wireless Traffic Untagged Drop Pass with native VLAN ID Tagged with native VLAN ID Pass as untagged Drop Tagged with other VLAN ID Pass Pass 4 2 6 4 1 4 VLAN Forwarding AU and SU The VLAN Forwarding feature is applicable only for Trunk Links Service Provider Links and Extended Trunk Links SU only It enables defining the VLAN ID values t
337. zeACCESS VL System Manual amp amp 140 4 2 6 2 10 1 4 2 6 2 10 2 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Menus and Parameters delay at 5 GHz is 3 3 microseconds per km 5 microseconds per mile The higher the distance from the AU of the SU served by it the higher the ACK timeout should be The ACK timeout in microseconds is 20 Distance km 2 3 3 or 20 Distance miles 2 5 M To ensure fairness in the contention back off algorithm between SUs located at different distances from the AU the size of the time slot should also take into account the one way propagation delay The size of the time slot of all units in the cell should be proportional to the distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it The Cell Distance Mode parameter in the AU defines the method of computing distances When set to Manual the Maximum Cell Distance parameter should be configured with the estimated distance of the farthest SU served by the AU When set to Automatic the AU uses a special algorithm to estimate its distance from each of the SUs it serves determine which SU is located the farthest and use the estimated distance of the farthest SU as the maximum cell distance The value of the maximum cell distance parameter either computed or configured manually is transmitted in the beacon messages to all SUs served by the AU and is used by all units to calculate the size of the time slot that must be the same for all units in the same sector
338. zeACCESSfamilies using GFSK modulation then one BS PS power supply AC or DC should be used to provide power to the BreezeACCESSVL Access Units and a different power supply module suitable for GFSK equipment is required for powering the BreezeACCESSGFSK Access Units Each BS AU module and its outdoor radio unit AU ODU comprise an AU E BS Access Unit that together with an external antenna serve a single sector There are two types of Access Units differing in the maximum number of Subscriber Units that they can serve M The AU BS Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units 124 when Data Encryption is used M The AUS BS Access Unit can serve up to 25 SUs except SU 54 refer to section 1 3 for details on availability of SU types in different bands Optionally it may be licensed to support also SU 54 units in bands where SU 54 unit type is available INFORMATION For convenience all references to AU BS are applicable also for AUS BS unless explicitly stated otherwise BreezeACCESS VL System Manual amp D Oo Chapter 1 System Description Base Station Equipment The AU ODU outdoor unit contains the processing and radio as k modules and connects to an external antenna using a short RF I cable i There are two types of AU ODUs Table 1 2 Access Unit ODU Types AU ODU Type Description AU E ODU A rectangular enclosure 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 cm with a connection to

BreezeACCESS VL 6.6 System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents